Skip to main content

Full text of "The laws of piquet adopted by the Portland and Turf clubs, with a treatise on the game"

See other formats


^4^Af\^ 


v>^t  kA 


NINTH  EDITION. 


Kx  Libris 
C.  K.  OGDEN 


PiaUET. 


A  2 


THE  LAWS 

OF 

:.  PIQUET  . 


ADOPTED    BY 


.      THE   PORTLAND    AND   TURF   CLUBS 

WITH  ^ 

A  TREATISE  ON  THE  GAME    ,, 

m 

^CAVENDISH" 


AUTHOR   OF 

'THE  LAWS  AND  PRINCIPLES  OF  WHIST" 

ETC.,  ETC. 


NINTH   EDITION. 


LONDON  : 

THOMAS    DE    LA    RUE    &    CO. 

1896. 


The  following  Clubs  have  given  their  adhesion 
to  the  Piquet  Laws  adopted  by  the  Portland 
and  Turf  Clubs,  viz. : — 

Army  and  Navy. 

Conservative. 

Guards. 

Junior  Athenaeum. 

Marlborough. 

New  University. 

Oxford  and  Cambridge. 

Reform. 

St.  James's  Whist. 

Union. 

United  University. 

United  Whist. 

Windham. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Preface ix 

THE    LAWS    OF   PIQUET         ....  i 

LAWS    OF    PIQUET  A 17  CENT          .         .         .  i6 

Cases  and  Decisions           .....  21 

TREATISE  ON   PIQUET. 

Preface 41 

Historical 43 

DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   GAME. 

Introductory. -83 

Dealing 83 

Discarding 83 

Calling  and  Showing 86 

Playing 93 

Carte  Blanche,  Pique  and  Repique       .         .  95 

Scoring 97 

EXAMPLE 103 

CHOUETTE    PIQUET 106 

CONDUCT  OF  THE   GAME. 

Shuffling 107 

Dealing 108 

Management  of  the  Stock 108 

Taking  Up  the  Hand 108 

Taking  In 108 

Calling  and  Showing 109 

Playing  the  Cards        .        .        ,        .        .        .112 

Scoring 115 


VIU  CONTENTS. 

DISCARDING. 

PACE 

Introductory         ii6 

General  Rules ii6 

Calculations 121 

Examples 125 

CALLING. 

Introductory 152 

Calling  the  Point 152 

Replying  to  the  Call  of  Point         .        .        -154 

Calling  Sequences    ......  156 

Sinking 156 

Examples  of  Sinking         .         .         .         .         .  158 

PLAYING   THE   CARDS. 

Counting  the  Hand 166 

Habit  of  Adversary 167 

Playing  to  Obtain  Information         .        .        .  168 

Establishing  a  Suit 169 

Preserving  Guards  and  Tenaces        .        .        .  169 

Playing  to  Save  a  Capot         .        .        .        .  170 

Playing  to  the  Score 171 

Examples 174 

ODDS   AT   PIQUET. 

The  Show 203 

Odds  at  Various  Scores 204 

Neglected  Variations  ......  207 

Odds  Irrespective  of  the  Tables  .         .         .  208 


PEEFACE. 

At  the  Annual  General  Meeting  of  the 
Portland  Club,  held  February  24th,  18S1,  it 
was  unanimously  resolved  that  a  Committee  be 
appointed  to  draw  up  Laws  of  Piquet.  The 
following  gentlemen  were  nominated,  and  kindly 
consented  to  serve: — 

John  Samuel,  Esq. 

{Chair77taji). 

Henry  Jones,  Esq.  I  Samuel  Smith,  Esq. 

M.  Trevelyan  Martin,  Esq.  |  Robert  Wheble,  Esq. 

The  Committee  having  drawn  up  a  Code, 
submitted  it  to  the  Turf  Club.  A  Committee 
was  appointed  by  the  Turf  Club,  consisting  of 
the  following  gentlemen,  who   agreed   to  serve: — 

The  Hon.  Henry  Leeson. 

Major  The  Hon.  Oliver  G.  P.  Montagu. 

Frederic  Norris,  Esq. 

The  Turf  Committee  proposed  a  few  amend- 
ments ;  and,  after  further  deliberation  and  dis- 
cussion, the  two  Committees  sanctioned  the 
publication    of  the    Laws    that    follow. 

Portland  Club, 

January,  1882. 


LAWS    OF   PIQUET. 


THE  LAWS  OF  PIQUET. 


SHUFFLING. 

1.  Each  player  has  a  right  to  shuffle  both  his 
own  and  his  adversary's  pack.  The  dealer  has 
the  right  of  shuffling  last. 

2.  The  pack  must  not  be  shuffled  below  the 
table,  nor  in  such  manner  as  to  expose  the 
faces  of  any  of  the  cards. 

CUTTING. 

3.  A  cut  must  consist  of  at  least  two  cards,  and 
at  least  two  must  be  left  in  the  lower  packet. 

4.  In  cutting,  the  ace  is  highest.  The  player 
who  cuts  the  higher  card  has  the  choice  of  deal, 
and  the  dealer  has  the  choice  of  cards  at  the 
commencement  of  each  partie. 

5.  If,  in  cutting  for  deal,  a  player  expose  more 
than  one  card,  he  must  cut  again. 

6.  The  cut  for  the  deal  holds  good,  even  if 
the  pack  be  incorrect. 

7.  If,  in  cutting  to  the  dealer,  or  in  reuniting 
the  separated  packets,  a  card  be  exposed,  or  if 
there  be  any  confusion  of  the  cards,  there  must 
be  a  fresh  cut. 

8.  When  a  player  in  cutting  has  once  separated 
the  pack,  he  must  abide  by  the  cut. 

B 


THE    LAWS    OF    PIQUET. 


DEALING. 

9.  The  dealer  must  deal  the  cards  by  two  at  a 
time  or  by  three  at  a  time,  giving  the  top  cards 
to  his  adversary,  the  next  to  himself,  and  so  on, 
until  each  player  has  twelve  cards.  The  dealer 
having  selected  the  mode  in  which  he  will  dis- 
tribute the  cards,  must  not  change  it  during  the 
partie.  The  eight  undealt  cards  (called  the  stock) 
are  to  be  placed  face  downward,  in  one  packet, 
on  the  table  between  the  players. 

10.  If  the  dealer  deal  the  cards  wrongly,  he 
may,  with  the  permission  of  his  adversary,  rectify 
the  error  prior  to  either  player  having  taken  up 
his  hand. 

1 1.  If  the  elder  hand  find  that  he  has  a  card 
too  many  or  a  card  too  few,  he  has  the  option 
of  a  fresh  deal  after  looking  at  his  hand,  but 
before  taking  up  a  card  of  the  stock.  If  the 
elder  hand,  having  twelve  cards  dealt  him,  find, 
in  drawing  the  stock  toward  him  after  discarding, 
that  it  contains  but  seven  cards,  he  has  the  option 
of  a  fresh  deal,  or  of  altering  his  discard. 

12.  If  more  than  one  card  be  dealt  wrongly,  or 
if  there  be  nine  cards  in  the  stock,  there  must  be 
a  fresh  deal  (except  as  provided  in  Law  10). 

13.  If  the  dealer  expose  a  card  belonging  to 
his  adversary,  or  to  the  stock,  the  elder  hand  has 
the  option  of  a  fresh  deal.  If  the  dealer  expose 
any  of  his  own  cards,  the  deal  stands  good. 


THE    LAWS    OF    PIQUET. 


14.  If  a  faced  card  be  found  in  the  pack  when 
dealing,  or  in  the  stock  when  taking  in,  there 
must  be  a  fresh  deal. 

15.  If  the  dealer  deal  with  the  wrong  pack,  and 
the  error  be  discovered  before  either  player  has 
taken  up  any  of  his  cards,  there  must  be  a  fresh 
deal  with  the  right  pack.  If  the  error  be  not 
discovered  before  either  player  has  taken  up  any 
of  his  cards,  the  deal  holds  good,  and  the  packs 
remain  changed. 

16.  The  players  deal  alternately.  If  a  player 
deal  out  of  his  turn,  and  either  player  discover 
the  error  before  taking  up  any  of  his  cards,  the 
deal  in  error  is  void,  and  the  right  dealer  deals. 
But  if  the  error  be  discovered  too  late  to  correct 
it,  the  elder  hand  in  that  deal  must  deal  twice 
running  with  the  same  pack  (except  as  provided 
in  Law  76),  unless  that  or  the  next  deal  be  the 
last  of  the  partie. 

17.  The  non-dealer  must  collect  the  cards  for 
the  ensuing  deal,  and  must  place  them,  properly 
collected,  face  downward  on  the  table. 

CARTE    BLANCHE. 

18.  Carte  blanche  (i.e.,  a  hand  dealt,  consisting 
of  at  least  twelve  cards,  without  king,  queen,  or 
knave)  scores  first,  and  consequently  saves  a  pique 
or  a  repique.  It  also  counts  toward  a  pique  or  a 
repique. 

19.  Carte  blanche  must  be  shown  by  counting 
the  cards,  one  by  one,  face  upward  on  the  table. 

B  2 


THE    LAWS   OF   PIQUET. 


20.  As  soon  as  a  player  is  aware  that  he  has 
a  carte  blanche,  he  is  bound  to  inform  his  ad- 
versary, but  he  need  not  show  the  carte  blanche 
until  his  adversary  has  discarded. 

DISCARDING    AND    TAKING    IN. 

21.  The  elder  hand  is  entitled  to  discard  five 
cards  and  to  take  in  five.  He  is  obliged  to  dis- 
card one  card  (except  as  provided  in  Law  42). 

22.  The  younger  hand  is  entitled  to  discard 
three  cards,  and  to  take  in  three  (except  as  pro- 
vided in  Laws  41  and  43).  He  is  obliged  to 
discard  one  card  (except  as  provided  in  Law  40). 

23.  In  taking  in,  the  cards  must  be  taken  in 
order  from  the  top  of  the  stock. 

24.  After  a  player  has  taken  up  a  card  of  the 
stock  he  cannot  alter  his  discard. 

25.  If  a  player,  after  having  taken  up  a  card 
of  the  stock,  take  back  into  his  hand  any  of  his 
discard,  he  must  play  with  more  than  twelve 
cards,  and  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

26.  If  a  player,  after  having  taken  up  a  card 
of  the  stock,  mix  any  of  his  hand,  or  any  card 
he  is  entitled  to  take  in,  with  his  discard,  he 
must  leave  it  with  his  discard.  He  must  play 
with  less  than  twelve  cards,  and  his  adversary 
counts  as  tricks  all  cards  that  cannot  be  played  to. 

27.  If  the  elder  hand,  when  taking  in,  or  when 
looking  at  cards  he  has  left,  expose  or  take 
up  any  of  the  bottom  three  cards  of  the  stock 
(except  as  provided  in  Laws  41  and  43),  he  can 


THE   LAWS    OF    PIQUET, 


reckon  nothing  that  deal.  And  similarly,  if  the 
younger  hand,  when  taking  in,  expose  or  take 
up  any  of  the  top  five  cards  of  the  stock  (not 
being  cards  declared  to  be  left  by  the  elder 
hand),  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

28.  If  the  elder  hand  mix  with  his  hand  any 
of  the  bottom  three  cards  of  the  stock  (except 
as  provided  in  Laws  41  and  43),  or  if,  having 
left  any  cards,  he  mix  with  his  hand  any  of  the 
cards  he  ought  to  have  left,  he  can  reckon  nothing 
that  deal ;  or,  the  younger  hand,  after  looking  at 
his  hand,  may  elect  to  have  a  fresh  deal.  If  he 
elect  to  stand  the  deal,  he  can  only  take  as 
many  of  his  cards  as  have  not  been  mixed. 

29.  If  the  younger  hand  mix  with  his  hand 
any  of  the  top  five  cards  of  the  stock  (not  being 
cards  declared  to  be  left  by  the  elder  hand),  he 
can  reckon  nothing  that  deal ;  or,  the  elder  hand, 
after  looking  at  his  hand,  may  elect  to  have  a 
fresh  deal.  If  he  elect  to  stand  the  deal,  he  can 
only  take  as  many  of  his  cards  as  have  not  been 
mixed.  If,  however,  the  elder  hand  have  taken 
in  some  of  his  cards,  the  others  remaining  on  the 
stock,  and  the  younger  hand  take  up  any  of  them, 
he  incurs  no  penalty,  unless  he  mix  any  of  the 
cards  taken  up  wuth  his  hand,  when  he  can  reckon 
nothing  that  deal. 

30.  If  a  player,  having  twelve  cards  dealt  him, 
discard  more  cards  than  he  takes  in,  he  must  play 
with  less  than  twelve  cards,  and  his  adversary  counts 
as  tricks  all  cards  that  cannot  be  played  to. 


THE    LAWS    OF    PIQUET. 


31.  If  a  player,  having  twelve  cards  dealt  him, 
take  in  more  cards  than  he  discards,  but  do  not 
take  from  the  stock  one  of  his  adversary's  cards, 
he  must  play  with  more  than  twelve  cards,  and 
can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

32.  If  the  elder  hand  do  not  take  all  his  cards, 
he  must  declare  the  number  he  takes  or  leaves 
before  taking  up  a  card  of  the  stock.  If  he  fail 
to  do  so,  and  the  younger  hand,  on  touching 
the  stock  (but  before  taking  up  a  card  of  it), 
find  that  it  contains  more  than  three  cards,  he 
is  entitled  to  alter  his  discard,  and  to  take  in 
the  card  or  cards  left. 

33.  If  the  elder  hand  leave  any  cards,  he  is 
entitled  to  look  at  them ;  but  if  he  take  them 
up,  together  with  the  cards  he  is  about  to  take 
in,  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

34.  The  younger  hand  is  entitled  to  take  in 
all  the  cards  that  are  left  in  the  stock. 

35.  If  the  younger  hand  leave  any  cards,  and 
take  up,  together  with  the  cards  he  is  about  to 
take  in,  more  cards  than  he  has  discarded,  he 
can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

36.  If  the  younger  hand  leave  any  cards  he  is 
entitled  to  see  them ;  but  he  must  declare  whether 
he  wall  look  at  them  or  not,  after  the  elder  hand 
has  named  the  suit  he  will  first  lead,  or  has  led 
a  card,  and  before  playing  a  card  himself.  If 
the  younger  hand  elect  to  look  at  them,  the  elder 
hand  is  also  entitled  to  see  them,  after  he  has 
named  the  suit  he  will  first  lead,   or  has  led  a 


THE   LAWS    OF   PIQUET. 


card.      If  the  younger  hand  elect  not  to  look  at 
them,  neither  player  has  a  right  to  see  them. 

37.  If  the  younger  hand  leave  any  cards,  and 
mix  them  with  his  discard  without  showing  them 
to  the  elder  hand,  the  elder  hand,  after  leading 
a  card,  is  entitled  to  see  his  adversary's  discard, 
and  the  cards  mixed  with  it. 

38.  If  a  player  announce  that  he  has  eleven 
or  thirteen  cards  dealt  him,  the  stock  may  be 
counted  to  ascertain  how  many  cards  it  contains. 

39.  If  the  elder  hand,  having  eleven  or  thirteen 
cards  dealt  him,  take  up  a  card  of  the  stock 
without  announcing  the  error,  he  loses  his  option 
of  a  fresh  deal.  He  cannot  alter  his  discard, 
and  he  must  leave  at  least  three  cards  for  the 
younger  hand.  But,  if  the  stock  contain  seven 
cards,  and  the  elder  hand  have  eleven,  there 
must  be  a  fresh  deal. 

40.  If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal 
when  he  has  thirteen  cards,  and  there  are  eight 
in  the  stock,  he  must  discard  one  card  more 
than  he  takes  in,  and  he  must  discard  at  least 
two  cards.  The  younger  hand  must  discard  one 
less  than  he  takes  in ;  but,  if  he  only  take  one 
card,  he  need  not  discard  any. 

41.  If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal 
when  he  has  thirteen  cards,  and  there  are  seven 
in  the  stock,  he  must  discard  one  more  card  than 
he  takes  in.  He  must  discard  at  least  two  cards ; 
and,  if  he  take  all  his  cards,  he  discards  six,  and 
the  younger  hand  can  only  take  two  cards. 


8  THE    LAWS   OF    PIQUET. 

42.  If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal 
\Yhen  he  has  eleven  cards,  and  there  are  eight 
in  the  stock,  he  must  discard  one  less  than  he 
takes  in ;  but,  if  he  only  take  one  card,  he  need 
not  discard  any.  The  younger  hand  must  discard 
one  more  than  he  takes  in,  and  he  must  discard 
at  least  two  cards. 

43.  If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal 
when  he  has  twelve  cards,  and  there  are  seven 
in  the  stock,  he  must  discard  the  same  number 
of  cards  as  he  takes  in ;  and,  if  he  take  all  his 
cards,  the  younger  hand  can  only  take  two  cards. 
The  younger  hand  must  discard  one  more  than  he 
takes  in,  and  he  must  discard  at  least  two  cards. 

44.  When  a  player  subjects  himself  to  the 
penalty  of  reckoning  nothing  that  deal,  the  adver- 
sary has  the  option  of  not  enforcing  the  penalty. 

45.  A  player  may  examine  his  own  discard  at 
any  time. 

CALLING    AND    SHOWING 

46.  The  elder  hand  must  call  his  point  first,  or  he 
loses  the  right  to  call  it.  It  is  sufficient  to  call  the 
number  of  cards  of  the  point.  The  younger  hand, 
is  not  entitled  to  reply  by  inquiring  what  the  elder 
hand's  point  makes,  unless  he  hold  at  least  an  equal 
number  of  cards;  and  the  inquiry  bars  him  from 
counting  a  superior  number  of  cards  for  point. 

47.  It  is  not  compulsory  on  the  younger  hand 
to  call  his  point  first ;  nor  is  it  compulsory  on 
either  player  to  call  sequence  next  after  point 


THE  LAWS   OF   PIQUET. 


48.  It  is  sufficient  to  call  the  number  of  cards 
of  a  sequence  if  the  call  be  good  against  the 
cards.  If  not  good  against  the  cards,  the  elder 
hand  is  bound  to  state  to  what  card  his  sequence 
is.  And  similarly,  in  calling  a  quatorze  or  trio, 
the  elder  hand  is  bound  to  state  the  value  of 
the  cards  of  which  it  consists,  unless  the  call  is 
good  against  the  cards. 

49.  If  the  elder  hand  first  call  a  sequence 
which  is  good  against  the  cards,  he  can  reckon 
any  sequences  he  holds,  whether  of  superior 
counting  value  to  the  one  called  or  not.  And 
similarly,  if  the  elder  hand  first  call  a  trio  or  a 
quatorze  which  is  good  against  the  cards,  he  can 
reckon  any  quatorzes  or  trios  that  he  holds. 

50.  If  the  elder  hand  call  a  smaller  point, 
sequence,  quatorze,  or  trio  than  he  holds,  he  may 
correct  his  miscall  before  it  has  been  replied  to 
by  the  younger  hand. 

51.  If  the  younger  hand  allow  a  correct  call 
to  be  good  or  equal,  when  he  holds  better  in 
his  hand,  he  may  correct  his  reply  before  the 
elder  hand  has  made  another  call ;  or,  in  case 
there  is  no  further  call,  before  the  elder  hand 
has  led  a  card. 

52.  If  either  player  call  a  larger  point,  sequence, 
quatorze,  or  trio  than  he  holds,  and  it  is  allowed 
to  be  good,  he  may  correct  his  miscall  before 
the  younger  hand  has  played  to  the  first  trick. 
In  case  of  a  correction  of  such  miscall  by  the 
younger  hand,  after  the  elder  hand  has  led,  the 


THE    LAWS    OF    PIQUET. 


elder   hand    is  at   liberty  to   retake  the   card  he 
led,  and  to  play  differently. 

53.  There  is  no  penalty  for  a  misnomer.  It  is  a 
misnomer,  if  a  player  call  a  point  or  sequence,  when 
he  holds  one  of  that  counting  value,  but  names  the 
suit  wrongly ;  or  a  sequence,  when  he  holds  one 
of  that  counting  value,  but  names  its  rank  wrongly; 
or  a  trio  or  quatorze,  when  he  holds  one,  but 
names  its  rank  wrongly;  provided,  however,  that 
he  could  not  possibly  have  held  what  he  claims, 
in  his  hand  and  discard  taken  together. 

54.  If  a  player  who  calls  a  point,  sequence, 
quatorze,  or  trio  that  he  does  not  hold,  and  such 
call  is  allowed  to  be  good,  do  not  correct  his 
miscall  before  the  younger  hand  has  played  to  the 
first  trick,  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal,  except 
in  the  case  of  a  misnomer,  or  of  his  having 
called  anything  which  he  could  not  possibly  have 
held  in  his  hand  and  discard  taken  together,  when 
he  is  liable  to  no  penalty.  On  discovery  of  the 
error,  the  adversary  may  reckon  anything  he  has 
good,  which  is  not  barred  by  a  correct  call  of  the 
player  in  error,  made  in  addition  to  his  miscall. 

55.  A  player  who  calls  anything  which  is 
allowed  to  be  good  or  equal,  must  show  the 
cards  called  at  any  time  they  are  asked  for,  or 
in  the  case  of  the  younger  hand,  at  any  time 
after  the  elder  hand  has  led  a  card.  If  a  player, 
before  he  plays  a  card,  voluntarily  show  anything 
which  he  claims  to  be  good  or  equal,  he  is  liable 
to  no  penalty  for  miscalling  what  he  has  shown. 


THE   LAWS    OF   PIQUET. 


56.  When  the  younger  hand  has  played  to 
the  first  trick,  neither  player  can  reckon  anything 
omitted  (except  as  provided  in  Law  54). 

PLAYING. 

57.  If  a  player  play  with  less  than  twelve 
cards  in  hand,  he  is  liable  to  no  penalty.  His 
adversary  counts  as  tricks  all  cards  that  cannot 
be  played  to. 

58.  If  a  player  play  with  more  than  twelve 
cards  in  hand,  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal ; 
but  his  cards,  though  not  good  to  score,  are 
good  to  bar  his  adversary. 

59.  A  card  once  led  or  played  cannot  be 
taken  up,  except  as  provided  in  Law  52,  and 
as  follows: — - 

I.   If  a   player   accidentally    drop   a    card   or 

cards,  he  may  retake  them. 
II.  If  the  leader  lead  two  or  more  cards 
consecutively  without  waiting  for  his 
adversary  to  play,  and  the  adversary 
play  too  many  cards,  he  may,  on  dis- 
covery of  the  error,  retake  the  extra 
card  or  cards.  All  cards  subsequently 
played  in  error  must  be  taken  up  and 
played  over  again. 
III.  If  a  player  lead  out  of  turn,  the  card  led 
may  be  taken  up,  unless  the  adversary 
have  played  to  the  trick,  when  the 
error  cannot  be  rectified. 


THE    LAWS   OF    PIQUET. 


IV.  If  a  player  do  not  follow  suit  when  able, 
he  must,  when  the  error  is  detected, 
retake  any  cards  played  in  error,  and 
substitute  the  suit  led.  The  players  also 
retake  all  cards  played  after  the  mistake, 
and  the  play  of  the  remainder  of  the 
cards  then  proceeds  as  though  no  error 
had  been  committed. 
V.  If  a  player,  when  asked  what  cards  he 
has  in  hand  which  have  been  allowed 
to  be  good  or  equal,  misinform  his 
adversary,  the  adversary  may  retake 
all  cards  ])layed  subsequently  to  the 
misinformation,  and  play  differently. 

60.  A  player  is  entitled  to  examine  both  his 
own  and  his  adversary's  tricks  at  any  time. 

SCORING. 

61.  Carte  blanche  scores  ten. 

62.  The  largest  point  is  good.  The  point, 
when  good,  scores  one  for  each  card. 

63.  The  longest  sequence  is  good;  as  between 
sequences  of  equal  length  the  highest  is  good. 
Sequences,  when  good,  score  as  follows  :  a 
huitieme  scores  eighteen ;  a  septieme,  seventeen ; 
a  sixieme,  sixteen ;  a  quint,  fifteen ;  a  quart,  four ; 
a  tierce,  three. 

64.  The  highest  quatorze  is  good.  Any  qua- 
torze  is  good  against  a  trio.  As  between  trios, 
the  highest  trio  is  good.  A  quatorze,  when  good, 
scores  fourteen.     A  trio,  when  good,  scores  three. 


THE    LAWS    OF    PIQUET.  1 3 

65.  In  playing  the  cards,  each  player  scores  one 
for  every  card  he  leads,  or  with  which  he  wins  a 
trick.  The  winner  of  the  last  trick  scores  two 
instead  of  one. 

66.  A  player  who  wins  more  than  six  tricks 
scores  ten  for  the  cards.  If  each  player  win  six 
tricks  the  cards  are  divided,  and  there  is  no  score 
for  them.  A  player  who  wins  twelve  tricks  wins  a 
capot,  and  scores  forty  for  the  cards  instead  of  ten. 

67.  The  scores,  whether  obtained  by  the  elder 
or  younger  hand,  reckon  in  the  following  order : — 

I.  Carte  blanche. 

II.  Point. 

III.  Sequences. 

IV.  Quatorzes  and  trios. 
V.  Points  made  in  play. 

VI.  The  cards. 

68.  A  repique  is  obtained  on  the  score  of  thirty 
being  made  by  a  player,  in  his  hand  alone,  by 
scores  that  reckon  in  order  before  anything  that 
his  adversary  can  count.  A  player  obtaining  a 
repique  adds  sixty  to  his  score. 

69.  A  pique  is  obtained  on  the  score  of  thirty 
being  made  by  the  elder  hand,  in  hand  and  play, 
before  his  adversary  has  reckoned  anything  that 
deal.  A  player  obtaining  a  pique  adds  thirty  to 
his  score.  A  capot  reckons  after  points  made  in 
play ;  and,  therefore,  does  not  count  toward  a 
pique. 


14  THE   LAWS   OF   PIQUET. 

70.  Errors  in  counting  the  hand,  if  proved,  may 
be  rectified  at  any  time  before  the  player  in  error 
has  seen  his  next  hand. 

71.  A  partie  consists  of  six  deals.  The  partie 
is  won  by  the  player  who  makes  the  higher  score 
in  six  deals.  If  both  players  score  the  same 
number  in  six  deals,  each  deals  once  more,  when 
the  partie  is  concluded,  even  if  there  should  be  a 
second  tie. 

Note. — By  agreement,  a  partie  may  consist  of 
four  deals,  the  score  in  the  first  and  last  deals 
counting  double.  In  case  of  a  tie,  each  deals 
once  more,  the  scores  in  the  extra  deals  count- 
ing single. 

72.  The  winner  of  the  partie  deducts  the  score 
of  the  loser  from  his  own ;  and  the  difference, 
with  a  hundred  added,  is  the  number  of  points 
won. 

73.  If  the  loser  fail  to  score  a  hundred,  the 
winner,  whether  his  score  reach  a  hundred  or 
not,  adds  the  score  of  the  loser  to  his  own ;  and 
the  sum,  with  a  hundred  added,  is  the  number 
of  points  won. 

74.  In  case  of  a  difference  in  the  written  scores, 
a  player's  score  of  his  own  hand  shall  be  taken  as 
correct 

INCORRECT    PACKS. 

75.  If  a  pack  be  discovered  to  be  incorrect, 
redundant,  or  imperfect,  the  deal  in  which  the 
discovery  is  made  is  void.  All  preceding  deals 
stand  good. 


THE   LAWS    OF   PIQUET.  1 5 

CHANGING    CARDS. 

76.  Before  the  pack  is  cut  to  the  dealer  a  player 
may  call  for  fresh  cards  at  his  own  expense.  He 
must  call  for  two  new  packs,  of  which  the  dealer 
has  the  choice. 

77.  Torn  or  marked  cards  must  be  replaced,  or 
new  packs  called  for  at  the  expense  of  the  two 
players. 

BYSTANDERS. 

78.  If  a  bystander  call  attention  to  any  error 
or  oversight,  and  thereby  affect  the  score,  he  may 
be  called  on  to  pay  all  stakes  and  bets  of  the 
player  whose  interest  he  has  prejudicially  affected. 


^^^i^ 


LAWS  OF  PIQUET  AU  CENT. 


The  Laws  of  Piquet  au  cent,  differ  from  those 
of  Piquet  in  the  following  particulars :  —  The 
player  who  cuts  the  lower  card  has  to  deal.  If 
he  expose  more  than  one  card  in  cutting,  his 
adversary  may  treat  the  lowest  of  the  exposed 
cards  as  the  one  cut. 

The  deal  is  by  two  cards  at  a  time. 

If  the  elder  hand  find  that  he  has  a  card  too 
many  or  too  few,  he  has  the  option  of  a  fresh 
deal  before  touching  the  stock. 

If  the  dealer  deal  with  the  wrong  pack,  and 
the  error  be  discovered  before  the  deal  is  com- 
pleted, there  must  be  a  fresh  deal  with  the  right 
pack.  If  not  discovered  before  the  deal  is  com- 
pleted, the  deal  holds  good. 

If  a  player  deal  out  of  his  turn,  and  discover 
his  error  before  taking  up  his  hand,  the  deal  in 
error  is  void,  and  the  right  dealer  deals.  If  not 
discovered  before  taking  up  the  hand,  there  is 
no  remedy. 

If  the  younger  hand  have  a  carte  blanche,  he 
need  not  declare  it  until  his  adversary  has  dis- 
carded and  touched  the  stock. 


LAWS   OF   PIQUET   AU  CENT.  1 7 

The  younger  hand  is  not  obliged  to  discard 
any  card. 

After  a  player  has  touched  the  stock  he  cannot 
alter  his  discard  (except  as  provided  in  Laws  of 
Piquet  II,  32,  and  38). 

If  the  elder  hand  mix  with  his  hand  one  of 
the  three  bottom  cards  of  the  stock,  he  loses  the 
game ;  and,  similarly,  if  the  elder  hand,  having 
left  a  card  or  cards,  mix  with  his  hand  any  of  the 
cards  he  ought  to  have  left,  he  loses  the  game. 

If  the  younger  hand  take  up  any  of  the  top  five 
cards  of  the  stock  (not  being  cards  declared  to 
be  left  by  the  elder  hand),  he  loses  the  game. 

If  the  elder  hand  do  not  take  all  his  cards, 
he  must  declare  the  number  he  takes  or  leaves 
before  touching  the  stock. 

If  the  younger  hand  leave  any  cards  and  elect 
not  to  look  at  them,  and  either  player  should 
then  look  at  them,  they  must  be  exposed,  and  a 
suit  may  be  called  from  the  offender  when  next 
he  has  to  lead. 

If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal  when 
he  has  thirteen  cards,  he  must  discard  one  more 
card  than  he  takes  in,  but  he  is  not  obliged  to 
take  in  any.  He  must  leave  at  least  three  cards 
for  the  younger  hand. 

If  the  elder  hand  elect  to  stand  the  deal  when 
he  has  eleven  cards  and  there  are  eight  in  the 
stock,  he  must  discard  one  less  than  he  takes 
in,  and  he  must  discard  one  card.  The  younger 
hand  must  discard  one  more  than  he  takes  in,  but 
c 


1 8  LAWS    OF   PIQUET   AU  CENT. 

he  is  not  obliged  to  take  in  any.  If  the  elder  hand 
elect  to  stand  the  deal  when  he  has  twelve  cards 
and  there  are  seven  in  the  stock,  he  must  leave 
at  least  three  cards  for  the  younger  hand.  The 
younger  hand  must  discard  one  more  than  he 
takes  in,  but  he  is  not  obliged  to  take  in  any. 

The  elder  hand  must  call  the  number  his  point 
makes.  It  is  not  sufficient  to  call-  the  number  of 
cards  of  the  point. 

It  is  not  sufficient  to  call  the  number  of  cards 
of  a  sequence.  The  elder  hand  must  state  to 
what  card  his  sequence  is.  And,  similarly,  if  he 
call  a  quatorze  or  trio,  he  is  bound  to  state  the 
value  of  the  cards  of  which  it  consists. 

If  the  elder  hand  call  a  smaller  point,  sequence, 
quatorze  or  trio  than  he  holds,  or  a  trio  when  he 
holds  a  quatorze,  he  must  abide  by  his  call,  and 
he  cannot  reckon  anything  superior,  even  though 
his  call  is  good  against  the  cards.  He  may, 
however,  correct  a  misnomer  of  sequence,  trio, 
or  quatorze,  before  he  leads  a  card,  and  may 
reckon  anything  of  equal  or  inferior  counting 
value,  provided  his  call  in  error  was  good  against 
the  cards. 

The  elder  hand  having  called  anything  which 
is  good  or  equal  must  show  the  cards  called, 
except  in  the  case  of  quatorzes  and  trios.  If  he 
lead  a  card  without  showing  his  call,  he  cannot 
reckon  it,  and  the  adversary  may  show  and 
reckon  his  point  or  sequence,  even  though  it  be 
equal  or  inferior  to  the  one  called. 


LAWS   OF   PIQUET   AW  CENT.  1 9 

If  the  elder  hand  show  a  sequence  and  call 
an  inferior  one,  he  cannot  reckon  the  superior 
one;  but  the  show  bars  the  younger  hand  from 
reckoning  his  sequences,  if  only  equal  or  inferior 
to  the  one  shown. 

The  younger  hand  having  allowed  a  correct  call 
to  be  good  or  equal,  must  abide  by  his  answer. 

If  the  younger  hand  disallow  a  call,  and  it  be 
discovered  that  the  call  of  the  elder  hand  is  good 
or  equal,  the  elder  hand  can  show  and  reckon 
his  superiority,  or  show  his  equality,  notwith- 
standing that  he  has  led  a  card. 

If  the  younger  hand  say  equal  or  not  good 
to  a  call,  and  play  to  the  first  trick  without 
showing  his  superiority  or  equality,  the  elder 
may  show  and  reckon  what  he  has  called,  not- 
withstanding that  he  has  led  a  card. 

If  a  player  call  a  quatorze  or  trio  which  he 
does  not  hold,  and  it  is  allowed  to  be  good, 
and  he  play  a  card  without  correcting  the  mis- 
call, he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

When  the  elder  hand  has  led  a  card,  or  the 
younger  hand  played  to  a  trick,  they  cannot 
reckon  anything  omitted. 

By  agreement,  points  ending  in  four  count  one 
less  than  the  number  of  cards. 

By  agreement,  in  playing  the  cards,  nines, 
eights,  and  sevens  are  not  counting  cards. 

Errors  in  adding  up,  or  in  marking  the  score, 
if  proved,  may  be  rectified  at  any  time  during 
the  game. 

C2 


LAWS   OF    PIQUET   A  U  CENT. 


A  game  is  one  hundred  up.  A  player  scoring 
a  hundred  before  his  adversary  has  scored  fifty 
wins  a  double  game. 

A  partie  is  won  by  a  player  who  wins  three 
games  out  of  five,  a  double  counting  as  two 
games. 

A  player  has  no  choice  of  cards  on  com- 
mencing a  fresh  partie. 


^^t&^ 


PIQUET. 


CASES  AND  DECISIONS. 


Case  I. 


A  calls  four  cards  for  point.  B  replies,  "  Equal." 
A  says,  "Forty-one."  B  then  finds  he  cannot  have 
a  point  of  forty-one,  but  that  he  has  a  point  of  five 
cards.     A  claims  to  score  the  point. 

Decision. — A  cannot  score  the  point.  He  has 
not  made  another  call  or  a  further  call  (Law  51); 
he  has  only  completed  an  imperfect  call. 

B's  reply  bars  him  from  counting  a  superior 
number  of  cards  for  point  (Law  46).  His  point, 
though  not  good  to  score,  is  good  to  save  a  pique 
or  a  repique. 

Case  IL 

A  calls  three  kings,  which  B  allows  to  be  good. 
It  is  presently  discovered  that  A  has  not  three 
kings.  B  then  claims  to  reckon  four  tens.  Is  he 
entitled  to  do  so  ? 

Decision. — Yes.  B's  admission  of  three  kings 
being  good  is  subject  to  A's  holding  them.  B, 
it  is  true,  might  at  once  have  disallowed  the  call ; 
but,  when  he  supposes  A  to  have  three  kings,  he 
may  desire  to  sink  his  tens,  and  this  he  may  no 
longer  wish  to  do  if  he  knows  A  to  have  a  king 
out. 


22  PIQUET. 

Case    III. 

A   proposes  a  fresh  deal. 

B  makes  no  reply  until  after  A  has  discarded, 
when  he  says  he  will  give  a  fresh  deal. 

A,  judging  from  B's  hesitation  that  there  is 
not  a  powerful  hand  against  him,  states  that  he 
does  not  now  wish  for  a  fresh  deal.  B  insists 
that  as  he  has  never  refused  the  offer,  it  is  still 
open. 

Decision. — The  law  does  not  contemplate  the 
offer  of  a  fresh  deal.  A  fresh  deal  is  a  matter 
of  agreement  between  the  players.  In  this  case, 
though  B  has  not,  in  words,  refused  a  fresh  deal, 
he  has  allowed  A  to  carry  the  game  a  step 
further  by  discarding.  This  is  tantamount  to  a 
refusal. 


Case  IV. 

A  calls  a  point  headed  by  ace,  and  two  tierce 
majors  in  other  suits,  and  leads  a  card,  but 
says  nothing  about  aces.  Can  B  reckon  three 
knaves  ? 

Decision. — B  cannot  reckon  three  knaves.  A 
has  declared  three  aces  by  implication,  and  can 
reckon  anything  he  has  omitted  before  B  plays 
to  the  first  trick  (Law  56)..  B's  course  is  to  play  a 
card,  saying  nothing  about  knaves,  when  A  loses 
the  score  for  the  aces. 

If,  however,  A  is  under  a  rubicon,  and  B  calls 
knaves,  if  A  objects  he  must  reckon  his  aces. 


PIQUET.  23 


Case  V. 


Elder  hand  directs  the  younger  to  discard  for 
carte  blanche.  The  younger  having  discarded 
three  cards,  the  elder  then  shows  his  hand,  and 
says,  "  I  leave  a  card."  Can  the  younger  hand 
alter  his  discard  after  having  seen  his  adversary's 
cards  ? 

Decision. — Yes.  The  elder  hand  should  state 
that  he  leaves  a  card  before  showing  his  carte 
blanche. 

Case  VI. 

Elder  hand  discards,  and  takes  up  a  card  of  the 
stock  (Law  24). 

Younger  hand  then  finds  he  has  a  carte  blanche, 
and  proposes  to  show  it  (Law  19). 

Can  the  elder  hand  alter  his  discard,  as  he  has 
not  been  informed  of  the  carte  blanche?     (Law  20.) 

If  not,  can  the  younger  hand  reckon  the  carte 
blanche,  as  he  has  not  informed  the  elder  hand  in 
time  for  him  to  discard  for  a  carte  blanche  ? 

Decisiofi. — The  elder  hand  cannot  alter  his 
discard.  The  younger  hand  can  reckon  the  carte 
blanche. 

A^ote. — This  is  a  matter  of  etiquette  rather  than 
of  law.  The  younger  hand  is  bound  to  inform  the 
elder  as  soon  as  he  is  aware  he  has  a  carte  blanche 
(Law  20).  If  he  is  not  aware  that  he  has  a  carte 
blanche  before  the  elder  has  taken  up  a  card  of  the 
stock,  there  is  no  help  for  it. 


24  PIQUET. 

The  younger  hand  cannot  be  required  to  do  an 
impossibility.  Of  course,  boiia  fides  is  assumed  on 
the  part  of  the  younger  hand,  />.,  that  he  has  not 
unnecessarily  delayed  his  declaration. 

The  old  law  was  that  the  younger  hand  need  not 
inform  the  elder  of  a  carte  blanche.  The 
distinction  between  the  duties  of  the  elder  and 
younger  hands  in  this  respect,  was  no  doubt  drawn 
in  order  to  preclude  the  occurrence  of  such  a  case 
as  the  present. 


C.\SE   VII. 

A  calls  three  queens.  B  says,  "Which  queen 
do  you  not  reckon  ? "  A  replies,  "  Queen  of 
diamonds,"  and  then  reckons  queens.  B  says, 
"Three  queens  are  not  good;  I  have  three  kings." 
Is  B  entitled  to  score  his  kings? 

Decision. — No.  Asking  which  queen  is  out  is 
equivalent  to  admitting  three  queens  to  be  good. 
B,  by  ascertaining  which  queen  is  out,  obtains 
information  to  which  he  is  only  entitled  in  the 
case  of  A's  scoring  the  queens. 


C.\SE    VIII. 

A  calls  three  kings.  B  says,  "Good.  Which 
king  do  you  not  reckon?"  A  replies,  "King  of 
diamonds."  On  playing  the  cards  it  is  discovered 
that  A  has  the  king  of  diamonds  in  hand,  and 
that  he  has  put  out  the  king  of  hearts. 


PIQUET.  25 

B  claims  that  A  can  score  nothing  that  hand. 
A  contends  that  it  is  only  a  misnomer,  for  which 
he  cannot  be  punished. 

Decisiofi. — B's  claim  is  correct.  It  is  true  that 
A  actually  held  three  kings ;  but,  as  the  reply 
of  the  elder  hand  is  only  a  substitute  for  showing 
the  kings,  he  has  defined  his  claim  to  be  for 
three  kings,  including  one  which  he  has  not  got. 
He  is  therefore  liable  to  the  penalty  for  scoring 
what  he  does  not  hold. 


Case  IX. 

A  calls  four  knaves  (holding  only  three).  B 
replies,  "Good."  A  then  says,  "I  beg  your 
pardon,  I  have  only  three  knaves."  B  replies, 
"Not  good."  B  might  have  held  four  aces,  but, 
having  discarded  an  ace,  has  only  three. 

A  thus  discovers  before  he  leads  a  card  that 
B  has  an  ace  out,  and  so  obtains  information  to 
which  he  is  not  entitled.     Has  B  any  remedy? 

Decision. — B  has  no  remedy.  It  is  one  of  those 
accidents  that  will  occasionally  happen  which  card 
laws  cannot  reach. 


Case  X. 

A  (elder  hand)  has  a  quint  major,  and  such 
other  cards  that  he  will  probably  put  B  to  a  card. 
A  places  the  quint  major  on  the  table  and  says, 
"  Play  five  cards." 


26  PIQUET. 

B  accidentally  plays  six  cards. 

At  the  end  of  the  hand,  when  A  plays  his 
last  card,  it  is  found  that  B  has  no  card  to  play 
to  it. 

B  claims  to  play  the  hand  over  again  (Law  59, 
par.  II.) 

A  urges  that  B  was  distinctly  informed  how  many 
cards  he  had  to  play ;  that  he  cannot  benefit  by 
his  own  mistake ;  and  that,  now  he  has  seen  all  the 
cards,  he  knows  which  card  to  keep  in  order  to 
save  the  capot. 

Decision. — The  hand  must  be  played  over  again, 
B  retaking  one  of  the  cards  he  played  to  the  quint 
major. 

A  might  have  protected  himself  by  counting  the 
cards  originally  played  by  B.  If  he  is  too  careless 
to  do  so,  he  must  take  the  consequences. 


Case  XL 

A  (elder  hand),  having  a  quint  major  in  clubs 
and  the  seven,  places  the  quint  major  on  the 
table  together  with  the  seven  of  spades,  and  says, 
"Play  six  cards." 

B  plays  five  cards,  and  then  takes  the  seven  of 
spades  with  the  eight.  A  then  says,  "  I  made  a 
mistake;  I  intended  to  have  played  the  seven  of 
clubs."     Can  A  rectify  his  error? 

Decision. — A  is  too  late  after  B  has  played  his 
sixth  card.  But  prior  to  that  A  can  rectify  his 
error. 


PIQUET.  2  7 


Case  XIL 


A  (elder  hand),  has  a  tierce  to  a  knave  in  clubs, 
good  against  the  cards.  He  might  also  have  had 
a  tierce  to  a  queen  in  hearts,  but  he  has  discarded 
from  that  suit.  He  calls  a  point  in  diamonds,  and 
a  tierce,  but  does  not  declare  in  what  suit  it  is, 
nor  to  what  card  it  is  (Law  48).  B  (younger  hand), 
plays  on  the  supposition  that  the  tierce  is  in  hearts, 
and  in  consequence  loses  the  cards.  B  then  claims 
to  play  the  cards  again,  on  the  ground  that  he  has 
been  misinformed  (Law  59,  par.  V.),  or,  at  least, 
that  he  has  not  been  sufficiently  informed. 

Decision. — B  has  not  been  misinformed,  and  has 
no  right  to  have  the  cards  played  again.  He 
might  have  protected  himself  by  asking  A  to  show 
the  tierce  (Law  55),  or,  what  amounts  to  the  same 
thing,  by  asking  to  what  card  the  tierce  is. 

Note. — As  a  matter  of  etiquette,  it  is  usual 
among  piquet  players  to  volunteer  information  when 
there  may  be  a  doubt  as  to  the  nature  of  the  claim. 
Thus  the  younger  hand  might  have  the  point,  good 
or  equal,  in  more  than  one  suit.  After  the  elder 
hand  has  led  a  card,  it  would  be  in  accordance 
with  custom  for  him  to  say  "  In  hearts,"  or  what- 
ever the  suit  may  be ;  or,  if  he  has  a  high  card 
of  his  point  out  that  might  influence  the  play  (his 
point  nevertheless  being  good  or  equal),  to  show 
the  cards. 

In  case  no  mention  is  made  of  the  suit,  the 
claim  is  generally  understood,  among  players,  to 


28  PIQUET. 

refer  to  the  highest  or  best  combination  that  can 
be  held,  in  the  case  of  the  tierces,  first  given, 
to  the  tierce  to  a  queen.  If  A  and  B  are  in 
the  habit  of  playing  on  that  tacit  understanding, 
B  has  just  cause  of  complaint,  and  A  should 
endeavour  to  repair  the  injury  inflicted  on  B,  the 
simplest  course  probably  being  not  to  demur  to 
B's  request  to  play  the  cards  again. 

Similar  observations  apply  to  quatorzes  and 
trios.  Thus  the  elder  hand  has  point  and  quart, 
both  good,  and  might  also  have  three  kings  and 
three  tens,  both  good  against  the  cards,  but  has 
put  out  a  king.  He  should  not  call  his  hand 
thus  : — "  Five  and  four  are  nine,  and  three  are 
twelve."  He  should  say,  "and  three  tens  are 
twelve." 

Case  XHI. 

B  (younger  hand)  accidentally  takes  up  a  card 
less  than  he  discards.  The  mistake  is  discovered 
when  the  hand  has  been  partly  played  out.  B 
claims  to  take  in  the  card  he  left  on  the  table, 
the  card  in  question  not  having  been  mixed  with 
his  discard. 

Decision. — B  can  take  up  the  card  he  left  on 
the  table,  unless  he  has  announced  that  he  will 
leave  a  card,  when  he  must  play  with  eleven  cards. 
If  B  has  not  renounced  in  the  suit  to  which  the 
card  belongs,  the  hand  proceeds  in  the  usual  way. 
If  he  has  renounced,  Law  59,  par.  IV.,  comes 
into  operation. 


PIQUET.  29 

Case  XIV. 

The  younger  hand  (B)  discards  and  takes  up 
the  bottom  three  cards  of  the  stock  before  the 
elder  hand  (A)  has  taken  in.  A  then  says,  "  I 
leave  a  card."     What  is  the  consequence? 

Decision. — B  having  taken  up  a  card  of  the 
stock  cannot  alter  his  discard ;  and,  as  in  taking 
in  he  is  obliged  to  take  the  cards  in  order  from 
the  top  of  the  stock,  including  cards  left  by  the 
elder  hand,  he  must  take  the  card  left  by  A, 
must  play  with  thirteen  cards,  and  can  reckon 
nothing  that  deal. 


Case  XV. 

The  elder  hand  holds  king,  knave,  ten,  nine, 
eight,  seven  of  diamonds.  He  calls  six  cards 
which  are  not  good,  and  a  quint  minor  which 
is  good. 

During  the  play  of  the  cards,  the  elder  throws 
ten,  nine,  eight,  seven  of  diamonds.  The  younger 
hand  then  says,  "  How  many  diamonds  ?"  The 
elder  replies,  "  Two."  The  younger,  supposing 
that  the  reply  is  only  as  regards  the  quint,  plays 
accordingly  and  loses  the  cards  thereby.  He  then 
claims  to  play  the  end  of  the  hand  again  under 
Law  59,  par.  V. 

Decision. — The  question  can  only  be  asked  with 
regard  to  cards  reckoned  for  or  called  as  equal. 
The  reply,    therefore,    can    only   be   with    regard 


30  PIQUET. 

to  those  cards.  The  younger  hand  has  been 
misinformed,  and  can  claim  to  play  the  end  of 
the  hand  again. 

Note. — This  decision  has  been  much  disputed. 
Compare  Case  XVI. 


Case  XVI. 

In  the  contrary  case,  of  a  player's  replying 
"  One "  (or  whatever  the  number  may  be),  when 
he  has  more  which  he  has  not  declared,  the 
adversary  must  take  the  reply  to  be  in  respect 
of  cards  reckoned  as  good  or  declared  as  equal. 

For  example : — B  (younger  hand),  who  has  dis- 
carded at  least  one  spade,  remains  with  three 
cards  in  hand,  viz.,  ace,  queen  of  hearts,  and 
king  of  spades.  He  has  not  declared  any  point, 
aces,  or  queens,  but  has  reckoned  a  quart  minor 
in  hearts.  A  (elder  hand)  has  ace,  queen  of 
spades,  and  king  of  hearts.  Before  leading,  he 
says,  "How  many  hearts?"  B  replies,  "None." 
No  one  disputes  that  B  is  justified  in  this,  and 
that  his  reply  is  understood,  by  all  piquet  players, 
to  mean,  "None  that  I  have  declared." 

Note. — In  both  this  and  the  previous  case  the 
question  put  is  irregular.  It  should  strictly  take 
this  form,  "  How  many  of  your  quint  ?  "  or,  "  How 
many  of  your  quart  ? "  as  the  case  may  be.  Or, 
the  request  may  be,  "  Show  me  anything  you 
have  declared"  (Law  55).  But  as  the  irregularity 
is  permitted   by  custom,   it  is  assumed   that   the 


PIQUET.  31 

player  who  has  to  answer  will  frame  his  reply 
wath  reference  only  to  cards  called  as  good  or 
declared  as  equal.  This  consideration  guides  the 
decision  in  Case  XV. 


Case  XVII. 

A  has  thirteen  cards  in  his  hand.  He  does  not 
notice  it,  but  discards  five  cards  and  takes  in  five. 
After  he  has  taken  in  it  is  discovered  that  he  has 
in  his  discard  a  card  belonging  to  the  undealt 
pack.     A  claims  a  fresh  deal  under  Law  75. 

Decisio7i. — There  is  no  proof  that  when  the  pack 
was  dealt  it  was  redundant.  The  surplus  card  may 
have  got  into  A's  hand  or  discard  after  the  deal 
was  completed.  A  is  liable  to  the  penalty  for  play- 
ing with  thirteen  cards,  and  can  reckon  nothing 
that  deal. 


Case  XVIII. 


The  facts  are  as  in  the  previous  case ;  but  A 
keeps  in  his  hand  the  card  belonging  to  the  un- 
dealt pack  instead  of  discarding  it. 

Decisio7i. — In  this  case,  if  A  has  not  played  the 
surplus  card  he  may  return  it  to  the  undealt  pack, 
and  there  is  no  penalty,  unless  A  has  used  this 
card  in  scoring  anything  that  is  allowed  to  be 
good,  or  in  showing  anything  that  is  allowed  to 
be  equal,  and  has  afterwards  led  a  card.  He  is 
then  liable  to  the  penalty  for  an  unfounded  claim, 


32  PIQUET. 

and  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal)  subject  how- 
ever to  the  possibihty  of  his  having  held  what  he 
claims,  in  his  hand  and  discard  taken  together,  as 
provided  in  Law  54). 

If  the  surplus  card  has  been  played  prior  to  the 
discovery  of  the  error,  the  hands  must  be  taken 
up  and  played  over  again,  the  surplus  card  being 
first  removed. 


Case  XIX. 

A  plays  with  thirteen  cards ;    B  with  twelve. 

B  wins  the  twelfth  trick,  and  scores  two  for  it. 

A  objects  that  the  twelfth  trick  is  not  the  last 
trick  (Law  65),  and  that  his  thirteenth  card, 
though  not  good  to  score,  is  good  to  bar  the 
adversary  (Law  58). 

Decision. — The  word  "last,"  in  Law  65,  pre- 
supposes that  each  player  has  twelve  cards.  B 
is  entitled  to  score  two  for  the  twelfth  trick. 


Case  XX. 

A  says,  "  Discard  for  carte  blanche."  While  B 
is  considering  what  he  will  put  out,  A  places  his 
discard  face  downwards  on  the  table,  and  takes  up 
some  cards  of  the  stock.  Can  A  then  show  his 
carte  blanche? 

Decision. — Yes,  provided  he  has  not  mixed  any 
of  the  stock  with  his  hand.  He  must  show  his 
hand  and  his  discard  separately,  as,  having  taken 


PIQUET.  33 

up  a  card  of  the  stock,  he  must  not  retake  any 
card  of  his  discard. 


Case  XXI. 

In  continuation  of  the  former  case,  B,  on  seeing 
A  take  up  a  card  of  the  stock,  says,  "You  have 
not  shown  your  carte  blanche."  A  repHes,  "  No 
more  I  have,"  reUnquishes  the  stock,  mixes  his 
discard  with  his  hand,  and  is  about  to  show  the 
carte  blanche,  when  B  objects,  that  A  having 
taken  up  a  card  of  the  stock,  and  then  retaken 
his  discard,  must  play  with  seventeen  cards,  and 
can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

Decision. — B's  contention  is  so  far  correct  that 
A  can  reckon  nothing  after  the  carte  blanche, 
which  (so  long  as  he  has  not  mixed  any  of  the 
stock  with  his  hand)  he  is  still  at  liberty  to  show 
and  reckon.  This  score  accrues  before  the  play 
of  the  hand  commences,  and  before  any  cards 
are  taken  in.  Consequently,  the  law  which  bars 
a  player  from  reckoning  anything  if  he  plays  with 
too  many  cards  does  not  apply  to  a  carte  blanche. 


Case  XXII. 

It  is  the  last  hand  of  a  partie.  A  (elder  hand) 
is  sixty-two.     B  (younger  hand)  is  ninety-two. 

A  holds  ace,  king,  queen,  knave,  nine  of  spades; 
king,  knave  of  hearts ;  knave  of  clubs ;  and  ace, 
queen,  knave,  ten  of  diamonds. 

D 


34  PIQUET. 

He  has  discarded  eight,  seven  of  hearts;  eight, 
seven  of  clubs ;  and  seven  of  diamonds. 

B  holds  ten  of  spades ;  ace,  queen,  ten,  nine 
of  hearts ;  ace,  king,  queen,  ten,  nine  of  clubs ; 
and  king,  nine,  eight  of  diamonds  (thirteen 
cards). 

By  mistake,  he  has  only  discarded  two  cards, 
viz.,  eight,  seven  of  spades ;  and  he  has  taken  up 
together  the  three  cards  left  in  the  stock.  As  he 
cannot  alter  his  discard  (Law  24),  he  is  obliged  to 
play  with  thirteen  cards,  and  can  reckon  nothing 
that  deal  (Law  35). 

The  elder  hand  calls  five  cards,  making  fifty. 
The  point  is  equal.  The  elder  then  calls  a  quart 
major,  a  tierce  to  a  queen,  and  four  knaves,  good 
for  twenty-one,  and  leads  five  spades.  To  these 
the  younger  hand  plays  ten  of  spades ;  nine,  ten, 
queen  of  hearts,  and  eight  of  diamonds. 

It  matters  not  now  what  the  elder  hand  leads. 
As  the  cards  happen  to  lie,  he  scores  most  by 
leading  king  of  hearts.  B  wins  with  the  ace,  and 
plays  five  clubs  and  divides  the  cards. 

The  scores  are,  A,  9 1 ;  B  (who  reckons  nothing), 
92.     B  wins  a  rubicon  (Law  73)  of  283  points. 

Now  if  B  had  played  with  twelve  cards,  he 
would  have  lost  a  rubicon.  This  is  easily  proved 
by  taking  from  B's  hand  the  card  of  least  import- 
ance to  him,  say  the  eight  of  diamonds.  A  leads 
five  spades,  as  before.  It  is  immaterial  what  B 
plays.  A  must  win  at  least  the  last  two  tricks, 
and  the  cards,  and  scores  forty. 


PIQUET.  35 

The  scores  are,  A,  102  ;  B,  98  (at  most);  but  as 
probably  B  has  seen  he  cannot  save  the  rubicon, 
it  may  be  taken  that  he  has  let  A  count  thirteen  in 
play,  when  the  score  will  be,  A,  106;  B,  92.  A 
wins  a  rubicon  of  298  points. 

Hence  B  profits,  by  his  own  blunder,  to  the 
amount  of  581  points.  The  example  is  taken 
from  actual  play. 

Similar  examples  could  be  furnished  as  to  the 
call  of  a  player,  with  thirteen  cards,  barring  a 
pique  or  a  repique,  and  as  to  the  extra  card 
saving  a  capot. 

The  penalty  of  scoring  nothing  that  hand,  when 
a  player  has  too  many  cards,  may  not  only  be  no 
penalty  at  all,  but  may  give  the  player  in  fault  an 
overwhelming  advantage.  That  this  should  be 
possible  is  a  serious  blemish  in  the  game;  and  it 
is  suggested  that  it  should  be  provided  against 
by  future  legislators. 

It  is  the  fashion  to  say  that,  in  the  long  run, 
the  habitually  careless  player  will  lose  more  than 
he  will  gain,  by  playing  with  the  wrong  number 
of  cards.  This  appears  to  the  Author  to  amount 
merely  to  a  lame  excuse  for  an  inadequate  law. 


<?(>- 


132 


A  TREATISE  ON  PIOUET 


"CAVENDISH." 


THE     MEMBERS 


THE     PORTLAND     CLUB 


^uniiBt  on  fiqnd 


CORDIALLY     DEDICATED. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 


Since  Hoyle's  Treatise  on  Piquet  was  published 
in  1744,  no  original  work  on  Piquet  has  appeared 
in  the  English  language  (so  far  as  the  author  has 
been  able  to  discover),  though  Hoyle  has  several 
times  been  edited  with  more  or  less  success. 

The  issue  of  an  authorized  code  of  Laws  * 
affords  a  good  occasion  for  the  publication  of  a 
fresh  treatise  on  the  game.  Although  the  plan 
of  it  is  original,  the  author  has  made  free  use  of 
the  examples  contained  in  Hoyle's  valuable  worL 
The  author  has  also  (through  the  great  kindness 
of  Mr.  Clay,)  been  able  to  avail  himself  of  that 
accomplished  player's  judgment  and  experience. 
For  the  assistance  rendered  to  him  by  Mr.  Clay, 
the  author  takes  this  opportunity  of  expressing 
his  warmest  thanks. 

Portland  Club, 

May,   1873. 

*  Of  Piquet  an  cent,  by  the  Portland  Club,  in  1873 
(and,  see  p.  81). 


PIQUET. 


HISTORICAL. 

Numerous  theories  have  been  broached  respect- 
ing the  origin  and  etymology  of  Piquet;  but  no 
positive  conclusions  have  been  arrived  at. 

First  as  to  the  origin  of  the  game.  By  some 
writers,  of  indifferent  weight,  it  is  referred  to  the 
period  of  the  reign  of  Charles  VI.  (1380-1422). 

Haydn  ("Dictionary  of  Dates"),  giving  Mez^ray 
as  his  authority,  states  that  Piquet  was  the  first 
known  game  on  the  cards  and  that  it  was  invented 
by  Joquemin  for  the  amusement  of  Charles  VI.  of 
France.  There  is  no  such  name  as  Joquemin 
to  be  found  in  any  of  the  biographies.  The  person 
referred  to  is  no  doubt  Jacquemin  Gringonneur, 
to  whom  is  erroneously  ascribed  the  invention 
of  playing  cards  in  the  reign  of  Charles  VI. 
Some  authorities  are  of  opinion  that  Jacquemin 
was  the  name  of  a  cardmaker,  or  gringonneur  of 
that  period,  gringonneur  signifying  a  maker  of 
grangons    {certus    tesserarum    ludus.     Du    Cange, 


44  PIQUET. 

Glossary,  Supplement,  Vol.  ii.,  col.  651).  Pcrsius 
(^'■Houge  ct  Noir.  The  Academicians  of  1823." 
London.  1823.),  says,  "Of  all  the  games  at  cards 
Piquet  is  the  most  ancient.  +  *  *  Its  origin 
is  somewhat  singular ;  a  great  Ballet  executed  at 
the  Court  of  Charles  VI.  suggested  the  idea  of  it." 

He  then  describes  the  ballet.  His  description 
is  identical  with  that  of  the  interlude  in  Le  Triomphe 
des  Da/ties,  printed  in  the  Theatre  Francois,  and 
danced  some  three  hundred  years  later.  He  pro- 
bably confuses  one  with  the  other. 

It  is  now  well  ascertained  that  Piquet  is  by  no 
means  the  most  ancient  of  card  games.  Paul 
Boiteau  d'Ambly  ("Z(?i-  Cartes  a  jouer  et  la  Carto- 
mancie."  Paris.  1854.),  rebuts  the  idea  that  Piquet 
could  have  been  played  in  the  time  of  Charles  VI. 
He  writes,  "  Oest  au  jeu  de  tarots  que  jouait 
Charles  VI.  *  *  +  JSfi  le  piquet  ni,  a  plus 
forte  raison  le  whist  11^ existaient.  *  *  *  II 
}iy  a  de  connu  que  le  tarot." 

The  latest  authorities  are  of  opinion  that  tarot 
cards  {i.e.,  emblematic  cards  combined  with  nume- 
rals), were  first  used  in  Italy  towards  the  end  of  the 
fourteenth  century,  and  that  soon  afterwards  the 
tarot  game  was  subjected  to  the  elimination  of  the 
emblematic  series,  leaving  the  numeral  series  to 
work  by  itself  It  is,  therefore,  most  unlikely  that 
cards,  with  which  Piquet  could  be  played,  were 
known  in  France  as  early  as  the  time  of  Charles  VI. 

It  is  next  attempted  to  fix  the  invention  of  Piquet 
on  the  period  of  Charles  VII.  (1422-1461);  and, 


PIQUET.  45 

as  this  date  is  commonly  upheld,  especially  by 
French  writers,  it  is  advisable  to  give  a  detailed 
account  of  their  views. 

In  the  "  Memoir e  sur  VOrigine  du  Jeu  de  Piquet 
trouve  dans  VHisioire  de  France,  sous  le  Regfte  de 
Charles  VII",  by  Le  Pere  Daniel  {Journal  de 
Trevoux.  May,  1720.),  Piquet  is  credited  with 
being  a  symbolic,  allegorical,  military,  political,  and 
historical  game.  From  the  names  of  the  personages 
on  the  court  cards  of  early  French  packs,  and  from 
^the  marks  of  the  suits,  the  Pbre  believed  he  had 
made  out  the  origin  of  Piquet,  which  he  supposed 
to  have  been  devised  about  1430. 

Chatto,  a  careful  and  sound  critic  ("  Facts  and 
Speculations  on  the  Origin  and  History  of  Play- 
ing Cards."  London.  1848.),  speaks  of  Daniel's 
theories  as  "mere  gratuitous  conceits,"  and  as 
the  seethings  of  the  father's  imagination. 

Saint-Foix  (^'- Essais  Historiques  sur  Parish 
Maestricht.  1778.),  patronises  the  ballet  theory. 
Referring  to  the  interlude  in  Le  Trioniphe  des  Dames, 
he  adds,  ^'■/e  crois  que  cet  Intermede  n^etoit  pas 
nouveau,  &=  quHl  n'etoii  que  Pesquisse  d^un  grand 
Ballet  execute  d  la  Cour  de  Charles  VII,  <S>^  sur 
lequel  on  eut  idee  du  jeu  du  Piquet,  qui  certainement 
nefut  if?iagine  que  vers  la Jifi  du  rlg7ie  de  ce Prince" 

Singer  ("  Researches  into  the  History  of  Playing 
Cards."  London.  18 16.),  follows  Saint-Foix,  but 
with  great  caution.  He  observes,  "  The  game  of 
Piquet  appears  to  have  been  invented  in  the  reign 
of  Charles  VH.     It  has  been  said  that  its  invention 


46  PIQUET. 

took  rise  from  a  Ballet  danced  at  the  court  of  that 
Monarch  ;  but  it  seems  quite  as  probable,  that  this 
game  furnished  the  device  for  the  Ballet,  as  it  has 
done  at  a  later  period." 

Leber  ("  Etudes  hisioriques  sur  les  Cartes  a  jouer." 
Paris.  1842.),  agrees  with  Daniel  in  assigning  a 
French  origin  to  Piquet,  in  the  time  of  Charles  VII. 

In  Boiteau's  "  Cartes  d,  jouer"  there  is  a  good 
deal  of  speculation  as  to  the  origin  of  Piquet. 
"  Rien  de  certain  ne  peut  etf'e  avatice  au  sujet  de  ces 
commencements  des  cartes  aux  couleurs  fran^aises  et 
du  jeu  de  piquet  qui  semble  ctre  ne  en  mime  temps 
qu'elles.  Le  nom  mtme  du  jeu  ne  s'explique  pas 
facilement.  Quoi  qu'il  en  soit,  les  cartes  aux  couleurs 
coeur^  carreau,  pique  et  trefle  existent  sous  Charles  VII 
et  ne paraissent  pas  avoir  tte  connues  sous  Charles  VI. 
De  plus,  la  creation  du  jeu  de  piquet  semble  se  rat- 
tacher  par  plus  d'un  lien  au  regne  de  Charles  VII. 
Maintena?it,  Est-il  possible  d^admettre  que  tout  d 
coup  aient  invejites  ce  jeu  et  ces  cartes  ?  *  *  * 
Dafis  les  cent  annees  qui  vont  de  1330  h  1430  il  a 
dH  s'introduire  au  milieu  des  cartes  antiques  plus 
d'une  vwdijicatio7i  qui  nous  echappe.  +  +  * 
CUst  Vopinioti  de  quelques  personfies,  qu'il  a  existe 
un  jeu  intermediaire  entre  le  tarot  meridional  ou 
allemand  et  le  piquet  francais.  De  ce  jeu  interme- 
diaire il  n'y  a  pas  de  traces,  comme  il  n^y  en  a  pas  du 
travail  qui  a  fait  naitre  le  piquet.  II  ne  faut  pas 
done  dire,  comme  M.  Paul  Lacroix,  que  le  jeu  de 
piquet  est  du  a  la  Hire  [the  famous  Stephen  de 
Vignoles,  a  devoted  adherent  of  Charles  VII.]  ou  ct. 


PIQUET.  47 

un  sen'ant  d'armes  de  ce  capitaine.  *  *  *  I! 
ne  fatd  pas  tion  plus  accepter  les  pretendues  expli- 
cations des  erudits  du  sihcle  dernier,  qui  ne  sont, 
en  general,  que  d'assez  mauvaises  conjectures.  Ce 
sera  dans  les  fetes  de  Chinon,  la  ou  Charles  VII 
perdait  si  gaiement  son  royaume,  ce  sera  encore  h 
Paris,  aprh  la  victoire  [1436]  et  dans  la  joie  du 
triomphe,  que  la  cour  galante  et  militaire  du  roi 
sauve  par  Jeanne  d'Arc  aura  imagine  et  opere  la 
reforme  des  cartes.  *  *  *  La  France  con- 
naisait  le  tarot  dans  la  seconde  nioitie  du  XI V^  siecle. 
*  *  *  La  connaissance  duj'eu  s'etant  repandue, 
elle  s'appliqua  d  approprier  les  cartes  a  son  genie. 
La  combinaison  dite  du  jeu  de  piquet  est  nee  alors. 
Cest  une  simplification  des  elemens  anciens.  Les 
couleurs  et  le  nombre  des  cartes,  aussi  bien  que  la 
creation  des  regies  fondamentales  du  jeu  de  piquet, 
datent  de  Charles  VII  et  probablement  du  milieu  de 
son  rtgne,  qui  est  aussi  le  milieu  du  XV^  siecle. 
Jusqu'd  ce  moment,  jusqu^au  tnilieu  du  XV ^  siecle, 
Ihistoire  des  cartes  est  enveloppee  d'obscurites.  La 
creation  du  jeu  frangais  est  la  chose  importante  dans 
cette  his  to  ire." 

Boiteau  admits  that  nothing  certain  can  be  ad- 
vanced on  the  subject  of  the  origin  of  Piquet,  and 
that  just  at  the  period  of  which  he  treats,  the 
history  of  cards  is  wrapped  in  obscurity.  After 
these  admissions  one  may  safely  consign  his  theory 
to  the  region  of  guesses. 

Dr.  Willshire  ("A  descriptive  Catalogue  of 
Playing  and  other  Cards  in  the  British  Museum." 


48  PIQUET. 

London.  1876.),  the  most  recent,  and  probably 
the  best,  authority,  remarks  that,  "There  is  not 
satisfactory  evidence  *  to  show  the  date  at 
which  piquet  was  first  played.  *  *  +  En- 
deavours have  been  made  to  associate  the  origin  of 
this  game  with  the  epoch  of  Charles  VII,  but  a 
decisive  solution  of  the  question  cannot  be  ob- 
tained." 

The  supposition  of  Grosley  i^'-  Mhnoires  histo- 
riques  et  critiq^ies pour  V Histoire  de  Troyes."  1774.), 
that  Piquet  was  invented  by  a  mathematician  of 
Troyes,  named  Picquet,  who  lived  in  the  reign  of 
Louis  XIII.  (1610-1643),  and  the  statement  of 
Strutt  ("Sports  and  Pastimes."  London.  1801.), 
that  Piquet  was  introduced  into  France  in  the 
middle  of  the  seventeenth  century,  may  be  met  by 
reciting  the  fact  that,  about  a  century  earlier, 
Rabelais  (1535)  includes  Piquet  in  the  list  of 
games  played  by  Gargantua.  Boiteau  believes 
that  the  Piquet  mentioned  by  Rabelais  was  a 
different  game;  but  this  original  notion  requires 
confirmation. 

Complex  card  games,  like  Piquet,  are  not  in- 
vented by,  nor  for,  individuals.  They  grow  out  of 
earlier  and  simpler  games,  until  at  last,  through 
the  survival  of  the  fittest  modifications,  a  highly 
developed  game  is  evolved.  As  Boiteau  well 
observes,  "  //  est  impossible  de  dire,  prenant  zm  jeu 
quelconque,  quHl  a  ete  invente  en  telle  annee  par  un 
tel.      Cest  tantot  Vun  et  tantot  Vautre  qui  s'avise 


PIQUET.  49 

d'aj Older  quelques  regies  a  tm  vieux  jeu,  d'en  changer 
le  nom ;  des  at?iis  adoptent ;  quelques  societes  a  la 
suite,  et  twila  une  Inveniioti."  It  is  therefore  to  the 
older  card  games  that  one  should  look  for  the 
origin  of  Piquet.  The  opinion  of  the  latest  writers 
on  the  history  of  playing  cards  is  that  France 
received  her  cards,  and  the  games  played  with 
them,  from  Spain  and  Germany,  and  that  these 
countries  obtained  them  from  Italy.  If  so,  an 
examination  of  the  early  games  and  cards  of  Italy, 
Spain  and  Germany  may  throw  some  light  on  the 
question. 

The  ancient  name  of  the  point  at  Piquet  was 
ronfle,  and  la  Ronfle  is  one  of  the  Gargantuan 
games  mentioned  by  Rabelais  (1535).  There  was 
also  an  Italian  game  called  Ronfa,  but  it  is  not 
known  how  it  was  played  Ron/a,  by  some,  is 
said  to  mean  "ruff";  very  likely  this  may  be  so, 
and  the  word  ruffing  may  also  mean  discarding  and 
taking  in,  as  it  did  at  the  game  of  Ruff  and 
Honours,  an  ancestor  of  whist.  Berni  ("  Capitolo 
del  Gioco  della  Pritniera  col  Co}?imento  di  Messer 
Pietropaulo  da  San  Chirico.  Stampata  in  Roma 
nel  Anno  M.D.XXVI."),  includes  Ronfa  in  a  list  of 
eleven  card  games,  played  at  that  time  (1526). 

In  one  place,  the  facetious  commentator,  who 
styles  himself  as  above,  thus  refers  to  the  invention 
of  Ronfa.  (The  quotation  is  taken  from  Singer's 
translation.)  '"We  have  but  little  certainty  who 
was  the  inventor,  or  who,  in  the  first  instance  de- 
veloped the  game,  nor  is  that  little  confirmed  by 
E 


50  PIQUET. 

authority  to  be  relied  on.  Some  say  it  was  Lorenzo 
do  Medici  the  Magnificent,  and  relate  I  know  not 
what  tale  of  an  Abbot.  *  *  *  Others  will 
have  it  that  Ferdinand  of  Naples,  who  so  distin- 
guished himself,  was  the  inventor  Others  Matthias, 
King  of  Hungary  ;  many  Queen  Isabella ;  some 
the  Grand  Seneschal.  *  *  *  We  shall  leave 
the  research  to  those  who  are  desirous  of  knowing 
how  many  barrels  of  wine  Acestes  gave  to  ^neas ; 
or  what  was  the  name  of  Anchises'  nurse ;  and  the 
like  curiosities,  worse  than  the  Egg  and  Chicken. ' " 

Since  ronjie  was  the  point,  and  ronfa  meant 
"  ruff",  and  ruffing  meant  discarding  and  taking  in 
from  a  stock,  it  is  hardly  too  much  to  assume  that 
Ronfa  was  a  game  in  which  discarding,  taking  in, 
and  calling  a  point,  were  prominent  features. 
Ronfa  or  la  Ronfle  may  have  been  a  simple  form  of 
Piquet ;  or,  the  similarity  of  the  words  ronfa,  ronfle 
and  ruff  may  be  mere  coincidences. 

When  Italian  cards,  and  the  games  played  with 
them,  travelled  to  Spain,  a  game  called  Cienios  was 
played  in  that  country.  Singer  says,  "As  this 
game  was  of  Spanish  original,  and  has  some  ap- 
pearance of  having  resembled  Piquet  +  *  * 
may  not  the  French  have  adopted  it,  with  some 
alterations,  merely  changing  its  name  ?  "  Boiteau 
confirms  the  idea  of  the  adoption  thus  : — "  Le  cent 
{piquet).  Le  piquet  s'appelle  encore  aujourd'hui 
le  cent  ou  la  grande  brisque  dans  la  Charente." 

Singer  assumes  that  the  game  originated  in 
Spain.      It  is  more  probable  that  Cientos  was  a 


PIQUET.  5 1 

modified  Italian  game,  possibly  Rottfa,  with  a 
change  of  name. 

From  Spain  or  France  the  game  came  to  Eng- 
land, where  it  was  called  Cent. 

There  is  no  similar  record  of  a  game  like 
Ronfa  or  Cientos  having  reached  Germany,  when 
Italian  cards  journeyed  to  that  part  of  Europe, 
The  material  leading  to  the  supposition  that  such 
a  game  was  played  in  Germany,  whence  it  is  geo- 
graphically and  historically  probable  it  travelled 
to  France,  is  very  slender.  What  little  there  is 
depends  on  the  amount  of  reliance  to  be  placed 
on  Merlin  {'■'■  Origijie  des  Cartes  a  jotier."  Paris. 
1869.).  The  following  quotation  is  taken  from 
Willshire  : — 

'"We  desired,'"  "writes  M.  Merlin,"  '"to 
be  able  to  point  out  in  a  satisfactory  manner 
what  were  the  names  and  structure  of  the  [early] 
German  games,  but  have  not  met  with  informa- 
tion precise  enough  on  the  subject.  We  must  be 
contented  with  communicating  a  few  remarks  with 
which  the  examination  of  the  cards  has  furnished 
us. 

" '  For  figures  we  meet  with  kings,  superior  and 
inferior  valets  [the  superior  knave,  obermatin,  is 
the  equivalent  of  the  queen  in  French  and  English 
packs].     *     *     + 

" '  The  point  cards  are  the  ten,  nine,  eight, 
seven,  six  and  two,  a  composition  resembling  our 
own  Piquet  [packs],  in  which  the  ace  has  been 
displaced  by  the  two.     This  structure  is    *    +    * 

E2 


52  PIQUET. 

that  of  the  Saxon  game  Sclnvertcr  Karte — cartes 
ct  Vepcc. 

'"What  appears  to  confirm  our  conjecture  as 
to  the  analogy  of  piqicet  with  this  jeii  a  I'epee,  is 
the  fact  that  in  the  modern  cards  manufactured 
at  Vienna  for  playing  the  German  game,  *  +  * 
the  six  is  suppressed,  as  it  is  in  the  French  piquet 
[pack]  since  the  end  of  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury.'" 

It  seems  not  improbable  that  an  Italian  game, 
bearing  a  likeness  to  Piquet,  grew  into  Cientos  in 
Spain  and  into  le  Cent  in  France;  and,  that  a 
game  played  with  sword  packs,  in  which  the 
number  and  value  of  the  cards  was  the  same  as 
in  piquet  packs,  was  known  in  Germany;  and  that 
a  modification  of  this  Sword  Game  (to  coin  a 
name  for  it),  afterwards  found  a  home  in  France 
under  the  title  of  Picquet  (the  old  spelling).  But 
how,  or  when,  the  most  advanced  form  of  the 
older  games  finally  established  its  supremacy  as 
Piquet,  history  does  not  relate. 

Next  as  to  the  etymology  of  Piquet. 

"The  new  World  of  Words"  collected  and  pub- 
lished by  E.  P.[hillips],"  (London.  Ed.  1696.), 
states  that  Piquet  is  "perhaps  so  called  as  a 
diminutive  of  Pique,  as  it  were  a  small  Contest 
or  Combat."  The  first  edition  is  dated  1658; 
but  Piquet  does  not  occur  in  it,  nor  in  the  editions 
of  1662  and  1671. 

Skeat     ("Etymological     Dictionary."       Oxford. 


PIQUET.  53 

1882.),  remarks  on    E.   P.'s  proposed   derivation, 
"This  is  ingenious  and  perhaps  true." 

According  to  the  Abbd  Bullet  ("  Recherches  sur 
les  Cartes  a  Jouer."  Lyon.  i757-)j  the  word 
Piquet  is  derived  from  Celtic.  Fiquo,  he  says, 
in  Celtic  signifies  to  choose,  and  pic  and  repic 
(the  old  spelling  of  pique  and  repique),  have  the 
sense  of  doubled  and  redoubled.  The  old  spelling 
of  pique  was  picq  and  of  repique  repicq,  but  that  is 
a  trifle.  The  ancient  name  of  the  point,  ronfle. 
Bullet  compounds  of  two  Celtic  words — rum,  a 
gathering  together,  and  bell  (in  composition,  fell), 
a  combat ;  hence  rumfell,  7'umjle,  ronfle,  an  assem- 
blage of  cards  of  the  same  suit. 

"  Pick "  probably  does  belong  to  the  Celtic 
languages,  but  there  is  no  consequent  reason  for 
associating  it  with  the  game  of  Piquet.  Skeat 
says  of  Celtic,  "This  is  a  particularly  slippery 
subject  to  deal  with,"  and  "we  must  take  care 
not  to  multiply  the  number  [of  borrowed  Celtic 
words]  unduly."  Prior  to  the  appearance  of  his 
^^  Recherches ^^  the  Abb^  was  engaged  on  a  Celtic 
dictionary,  and  he  refers  many  words  of  doubtful 
etymology  to  Celtic.  The  coincidences  he  points 
out  are  generally  regarded  as  more  curious  than 
valuable. 

Grosley's  fable  that  the  game  was  invented  by 
a  man  named  Picquet  would  hardly  be  worth 
notice,  but  that  it  has  been  repeated  (guardedly, 
it  is  true),  by  others.  Persius  says,  "It  appears 
very  probable  that  this  game  bears  the  name  of 


54  PIQUET. 

its  inventor."  And  Littrd  has,  "The  game  is 
supposed  to  have  been  named  after  its  inventor." 

It  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  games  like 
Piquet  are  not  invented  by  any  one  person. 

In  the  absence  of  a  better  etymology,  the  sug- 
gestion that  the  name  of  the  game  may  have  been 
derived  from  the  spade  suit,  is  submitted  for  con- 
sideration. 

In  the  oldest  known  playing  cards,  combined 
with  tarots,  the  suit  of  spades  was  represented  by 
bona  fide  swords,  and  was  named  spade  in  Italian, 
espadas  in  Spanish.  The  sword  also  obtained,  as 
a  suit  mark,  in  cards  used  in  Germany ;  but  the 
Germans  soon  altered  it  into  laub  or  griin^  the 
mark  being  shaped  like  a  plum-leaf. 

In  numeral  cards,  unconnected  with  tarots,  the 
suit  of  spades  was  called  picche  in  Italian,  picas  in 
Spanish,  as  early  as  the  time  of  Charles  VII.  of 
France. 

The  French  appear  to  have  adopted  the  German 
symbol,  griin,  and  to  have  called  it  pique,  after  the 
Italian  name.  Leber,  in  a  sentence  translated  by 
Chatto,  says,  '"In  the  southern  parts  of  Europe 
the  French  Pique  is  La  Picca  or  La  Spada. ' " 

Merlin  asserts  that  a  game  was  played  in  Ger- 
many with  sword  cards,  which  in  their  composition 
resemble  piquet  packs  ;  and  conjectures  that  the 
French  Piquet  was  analogous  to  this  nameless 
game. 

The  suggestion,  offered  with  hesitation,  is  that 
Piquet  may  be  a  developed  form  of  the  analogous 


PIQUET.  55 

German  game,  and  that,  being  played  with  pique 
cards  in  France,  it  may  there  consequently  have 
obtained  the  name  of  Piquet. 

Neither  Cent  nor  Piquet  are  mentioned  by 
Shakespeare.  And  it  is  somewhat  remarkable 
that  though  Cent  frequently  occurs  in  English 
books  of  the  Shakespearian  period,  Piquet,  so 
far  as  is  known,  never  does.  In  Nares'  ("Glossary 
of  Words  in  Works  of  English  Authors  of  the  Time 
of  Shakespeare  "),  Cent  and  many  other  games  find 
a  place,  but  Piquet  does  not  appear.  From  this  it 
may  be  concluded  that  Cent  was  played  in  Eng- 
land until  about  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth 
century,  when  the  word  Cent  went  out  of  use, 
and  was  replaced  by  the  word  Piquet. 

That  the  two  games  were  practically  identical 
will  presently  be  made  evident.  The  change  from 
Cent  to  Piquet,  in  England,  may  therefore  be 
regarded  as  one  of  name  only,  and  may  perhaps 
be  thus  accounted  for.  From  the  time  of  the 
marriage  of  Mary  with  Philip  of  Spain  (1554), 
the  English  equivalent  of  the  Spanish  name  of 
the  game  was  in  vogue.  In  1625,  Charles  I. 
married  the  daughter  of  Henry  IV.  of  France. 
When  a  French  Princess  came  on  the  scene  the 
French  name.  Piquet,  was  contemporaneously  sub- 
stituted for  the  Spanish  name. 

Cent  was  sometimes  corrupted  into  Saunt,  Saint, 
Cente,  Sent,  and  Sant ;  and  the  word  occasionally 
has  the  prefix  "Mount."     So  far  as  is  known,  the 


56  PIQUET. 

meaning  of  this  prefix  has  never  been  explained. 
A  few  quotations  from  authors  of  the  period  (1532 
to  1656),  may  prove  of  interest. 

The  earliest  known  reference  to  Cent  is  in  "A 
Manifest  Detection  of  the  most  vyle  and  detestable 
Use  of  Diceplay,  and  other  Practises  lyke  the  same; 
A  Myrour  very  necessary  for  all  younge  Gentilman 
and  others  sodenly  enabled  by  worldly  AbiJdance, 
to  loke  in.  Newly  set  forth  for  theire  Behoufe.", 
a  very  rare  tract,  printed  in  1532,  and  said  to  be 
by  Gilbert  Walker.  The  Percy  Society's  reprint 
(1850.),  is  quoted: — 

" '  After  the  table  was  removed,  in  came  one 
of  the  waiters  with  a  fair  silver  bowl,  full  of  dice 
and  cards.  *  *  *  Then  each  man  choose  his 
game.'" 

The  writer  goes  on  to  say,  "  '  Because  I  alleged 
ignorance  [of  dice]  *  *  *  we  fell  to  Saunt, 
five  games  a  crown.' "  This  looks  as  though  the 
stake  was  on  the  old-fashioned  partie,  best  of 
five  games. 

Another  early  reference  is  to  be  met  with  in 
Turberville's  "Book  of  Faulconrie"  (1575.)  = — 

"At  coses  or  at  Saunt  to  sit, 
Or  set  their  rest  at  prime." 

In  the  "Book  of  Howshold  Charges  and  other 
Paiments  laid  out  by  the  L.  [ord]  North  and  his 
Commandement"  (Nichol's  "Progresses  of  Queen 
Elizabeth"),  there  are  several  entries  of  losses  at 


PIQUET.  5  7 

play.  In  the  entry,  1578,  May  15  to  17,  there 
occurs,  "Lost  at  Saint,  xv.s." 

This  is  interesting,  as  showing  that  at  that  time 
Cent  was  a  fashionable  game,  and  played  at  court. 
Lord  North  used  frequently  to  play  with  the  Queen, 
and  there  are  several  entries  of  money  lost  to  her, 
but  the  names  of  the  games  are  omitted. 

Northbrooke  calls  the  game  Cente.  In  "A 
Treatise,  wherein  Dicing,  Daucing,  Vaine  Plaies  or 
Enterludes  are  reprooved  ".  (London.  1577.),  the 
author  thus  addresses  the  reader  : — 

"  What  is  a  man  now  a  dales  if  he  knows  not 
fashions  ?  *  *  *  To  plaie  their  twentie,  fortie, 
or  100./.  at  Gardes,  Dice,  &c..  Post,  Cente,  Gleke 
or  such  other  games  :  if  he  cannot  thus  do  he  is 
called  a  miser,  a  wretch,  a  lobbe,  a  cloune,  and  one 
that  knoweth  no  fellowship  nor  fashions,  and  less 
honestie." 

The  "honestie"  is  not  apparent  in  all  cases.  In 
"  No-body  and  Some-body ",  an  anonymous  play 
(circa  1592.),  Lord  Sicophant  confers  with  Some- 
body, the  stage  villain,  as  to  introducing  "  Deceit- 
full  Cards  "  at  Court,  the  guilt  to  be  made  to  rest 
with  No-body.  During  the  conversation,  Sicophant 
shows  cards  prepared  for  cheating  at  various  games, 
and,  (/.  1533),  says,  "These  are  for  saunt." 

This  is  no  mere  effort  of  imagination  on  the  part 
of  the  playwright.  The  use  of  "  Deceitfull  Cards  " 
at  Saunt,  about  this  time,  was  unfortunately  a  fact. 
They  are  mentioned  in  "Dice  Play";  and  the 
action    of    Baxter   vers.    Woodyard    and   others ", 


58  PIQUET. 

brought  in  1605,  was  for  cheating  at  this  game 
with  prejiared  cards,  as  the  following  extract  from 
Moore's  "  Reports  "  (1688.)  shows  : — 

"  Accofi  sur  le  case  sur  deceit  enter  eux  pj-actise  p 
luy  disceavcr  al  Cards,  al  tin  game  le  Mountsant, 
per  inducer  d'zin  Carde  appel  le  Biimcarde  per  que 
ils  devise  que  le  pi'  [plaintiff]  71'  averoit  que  iiels 
games  que  ils  plerofit,  &'  joyndront  ascun  foils  a  lour 
pleasure,  per  quel  cosojiage  6^  deceite,  colore  ludendi, 
ils  defraud  le  pV  de  16/.  les  def  pleade  non  culp', 
6^  I e  Jury  eux  trove  culp'  &•  assesse  damages." 

In  Minsheu's  "Pleasant  and  delightfull  Dialogues, 
Spanish  and  English"  (London.  1599.),  the  game 
is  also  called  Mount  Sant.  In  the  third  Dialogue 
between  "  five  gentlemen  friendes,"  Rodricke,  Sir 
Lorenzo  and  Mendoza  converse  thus: — 

"  R.   Here  are  the  cards.     What  shall  we  play  at? 
*»♦«»* 

L.  At  Mount  Sant. 

M.  It  makes  my  head  to  be  in  a  swovme  to  be  alwaies 
counting." 

In  "A  Woman  kilde  with  Kindnesse,"  a  play, 
by  Thomas  Hey  wood,  acted  before  the  year  1604, 
Cent  is  called  Saint :   "  Husband,  shall  we  play  at 

Saint?"  and  in  Gervas  Markham's  "Famous 

or  Noble  Curtezan"  (1609.),  Cent  is  called  Mount- 
cent: — 


"Were  it  Mount-cent,  primero,  or  at  chesse, 
I  wan  with  most,  and  lost  still  with  the  lesse." 


PIQUET.  59 

Brewer  ("Lingua,  or  the  Combat  of  the  Tongue 
and  five  Senses."  1607.),  reverts  to  the  older  spell- 
ing Saunt.  "  As  for  Memory,  he's  a  false  hearted 
fellow,  he  always  deceives  them ;  they  respect  not 
him,  except  it  be  to  play  a  Game  at  Chests,  Pri- 
mero,  Saunt,  Maw,  or  such  like." 

In  "The  Dumb  Knight"  (1608.),  by  Lewis 
Machin,  there  is  a  direct  statement  that  the  name 
of  the  game  was  derived  from  a  hundred.  The 
play  also  contains,  in  punning  allusions  to  the  love 
affairs  of  two  of  the  characters,  important  materials 
for  establishing  the  great  similarity  of  Cent  to 
Piquet. 

"  Enter  aloft  to  cards  the  Queen  and  Phylocles. 

Q.  Come,  my  Lord,  take  your  place,  here  are  cards,  and 
here  are  my  crowns. 

P.  And  here  are  mine ;  at  what  game  will  your  Majesty 
play? 

Q.  At  Mount-Saint. 

P.  A  royal  game,  and  worthy  of  the  name 
And  meetest  even  for  Saints  to  exercise ; 
Sure  it  was  of  a  woman's  first  invention. 

Q.   It  is  not  Saint,  but  Cent,  taken  from  hundreds. 

P.   True,  for  'mongst  millions  hardly  is  found  one  saint. 

Q.   Indeed  you  may  allow  a  double  game. 
But  come,  lift  for  the  dealing:  it  is  my  chance  to  deal. 

P.   An  action  most,  most  proper  to  your  sex. 


Q.  What  are  you,  my  Lord  ? 

P.   Your  Highness'  servant,  but  misfortune's  slave. 
Q.   Your  game,  I  mean. 

P.   Nothing  in  show,  yet  somewhat  in  account : 
Madam,  I  am  blank. 


6o  PIQUET. 

Q.  You  are  a  double  game,  and  I  am  no  less. 
There's  an  hundred,  and  all  cards  made  but  one  knave. 

****** 

What's  your  game  now  ? 

P.  Four  king's,  as  I  imagine. 

Q.  Nay,  I  have  two,  yet  one  doth  me  little  good. 

P.  Indeed,  mine  are  two  queens,  and  one  I'll  throw  away. 

♦  ♦»»♦• 

P.  Can  you  decard,  madam  ? 
Q.   Hardly,  but  I  must  do  hurt." 

Here  the  mention  of  showing,  of  the  blank 
(carte  blanche),  of  double  games  (counted  in  the 
old  fashioned  partie),  of  four  kings,  of  throwing 
away,  and  of  the  decard  (discard)  prove  conclu- 
sively the  likeness  of  the  two  games. 

In  Taylor's  "Motto"  (1621.),  Cent,  under  the 
spelling  Sant,  is  enumerated  among  the  games  at 
which  the  prodigal  "  flings  his  money  free  with 
carelessnesse  ": — 

"  Ruffe,  Slam,  Trump,  Nody,  Whisk,  Hole,  Sant,  New  Cut." 

In  the  "Annalia  Dubrensia.  Upon  the  yerely 
celebration  of  Mr.  Robert  Dover's  Olimpick  games 
upon  Cotswold  Hills"  (1636.),  a  very  rare  book  of 
which  a  copy  is  preserved  in  the  Grenville  Library, 
contributed  to  by  thirty-two  authors  of  the  period, 
including  Michael  Drayton,  Ben  Jonson,  Trussell, 
and  others  of  less  note,  the  game  is  spelt  Cent. 
In  the  eulogium  on  Dover  by  William  Denny 
this  passage  occurs  : — 

"Cent  for  those  Gentrj',  who  their  states  have  marr'd. 
That  Game  befitts  them,  for  they  must  discard." 


PIQUET.  6 1 

This  again  shows  that  discarding  was  part  of  the 
game. 

Sir  WiUiam  Davenant,  Poet  Laureate  after  Ben 
Jonson,  in  "  The  Witts,  a  Comedy  present'd  at  the 
Private  House  in  Black  Fryers"  (1636.),  spells  the 
game  Sent : — 


"  While  their  glad  sons  are  left  seven  for  their  chance 
At  hazard  :  hundred  and  all  made  at  Sent." 


The  inference  is,  as  before,  that  "  Sent "  was  played 
a  hundred  up. 

The  following  quotation  from  "The  Discovery 
of  a  most  Exquisite  Jewel,  found  in  the  Kennel 
of  Worcester  Streets,  the  Day  after  the  Fight " 
(165 1.),  by  Sir  Thomas  Urquhart  of  Cromarty, 
shows  that  the  name  of  the  game  was  sometimes 
anglicised  into  Hundred :  "  Verily  I  think  they 
make  use  of  Kings  as  we  do  of  card  Kings  in 
playing  at  the  Hundred  ;  any  one  whereof,  if  there 
be  appearance  of  a  better  game  without  him  (and 
that  the  exchange  of  him  for  another  incoming 
card  is  likely  to  conduce  more  for  drawing  the 
stake),  is  by  good  gamesters  without  any  cere- 
mony discarded." 

If  further  evidence  is  required  that  the  game 
of  Cent  was  so  called  from  its  being  played  a 
hundred  up,  it  may  be  obtained  from  a  little 
book,  published  in  1656,  entitled  "The  Scholer's 
Practicall  Cards,"  by  F.  Jackson,  M.A.  It  is 
chiefly   occupied   with    instructions  how  to  spell, 


62  PIQUET. 

write,  cypher,  and  cast  accounts,  by  means  of 
cards.  Several  games  are  mentioned  in  it,  and 
among  them  Saunt  which  the  author  explains  by 
centum,  a  hundred. 

Probably  the  earliest  mention  of  Piquet,  in  print, 
is  by  Rabelais  (1535).  As  already  stated,  he  in- 
cludes it  in  the  list  of  games  played  by  Gargantua ; 
and  it  is  to  be  noted  that  le  Cefit  and  la  Ronfie  are 
also  to  be  found  there. 

It  is  not  until  after  the  lapse  of  rather  more 
than  a  hundred  years  that  Piquet  appears  with 
any  frequency  in  French  books,  or  at  all  in 
English  books.  It  will  be  convenient  first  to 
take  a  few  of  the  most  interesting  French  refer- 
ences of  the  seventeenth  century,  and  then  to 
review  Piquet  in  England  from  that  time  to  the 
present. 

The  earliest  work  on  Piquet  extant  is,  probably, 
"Z^  Royal  lev  dv  Piqvet  plaisant  6^  recreatif. 
Reueu  et  corrige  en  cette  derniere  Edition,  pour  le 
Contentevient  de  ceux  qui  font  Professio7i  d'en 
observer  les  Regies."  {Rouefi.  1647.).  This  is  the 
earliest  edition  to  be  met  with  in  the  British 
Museum.  The  book  was  translated  into  English 
in  1 65 1,  with  the  following  title  : — "  The  Royall  and 
delightfull  game  of  Picquet  written  in  French  and 
now  rendred  into  English  out  of  the  last  French 
edition.  London.  Printed  for  J.  Martin  and 
J.  Ridley,  and  are  to  be  sold  at  the  Castle  in 
Fleet-street  nere  Ram  alley." 


PIQUET.  6^ 

The  following  is  the  translation  of  the  preface : — 

"  There  comming  to  my  hands,  not  long  since,  a  small 
Treatise,  concerning  the  game  of  PICQUET,  and  having 
perused  the  same  ;  I  have  since  thought  fit  to  communicate 
it  to  the  World  ;  as  being  a  game  approved  of  everywhere, 
especially  among  the  Gentry,  and  persons  of  Honour.  It 
is  a  kind  of  Divertion,  so  sweet,  and  pleasing,  as  that  it 
makes  the  houres  slide  away  insensibly  :  it  easeth  the  Gouty 
person  ;  cleares  up  the  melancholicke  spirit ;  and  refresheth 
the  pensive  Lover.  These  considerations  are  of  sufficient 
force  to  put  in  any  one  a  desire  to  the  Play :  But  that  which 
should  most  stir  you  up  to  the  purchasing  of  this  Booke,  is, 
that  you  have  here  laid  downe  before  you,  an  absolute,  and 
exact  account  of  the  whole  Game,  and  have  all  the  dif- 
ficulties, that  may  arise  therein,  fully  resolved.  If  you  there- 
fore but  observe  the  Rules  and  Maximes  here  delivered  ;  you 
shall  avoid  all  the  quarrells,  which  usually  arise  amongst 
Gamesters,  for  want  of  being  thoroughly  informed  in  the 
Game  ;  and  shall  preserve  mutuall  Society,  which  is  the 
Bond  that  unites  all  things.  Be  sure,  therefore,  that  you 
purchase  this  Booke  :  For  in  so  doing,  you  shall  not  only 
much  advantage  your  selves,  but  me  also." 

According  to  this  treatise  the  game  was  played 
with  thirty-six  cards,  the  sixes  remaining  in  the 
pack ;  the  set  or  number  up  was  a  matter  of 
agreement,  but  was  usually  fixed  at  a  hundred, 
it  being  "  in  the  choice  of  the  Gamesters  to  make 
it  more  or  lesse."  In  cutting  for  deal,  more  than 
one  card  must  be  "lifted,"  as  the  top  one  might  be 
known  by  the  back.  In  this  remark  is  seen  the 
reason  for  several  of  the  severe  rules  which  for- 
merly obtained  at  Piquet,  such,  for  instance,  as 
allowing  no  change  of  discard  after  touching — 


64  PIQUET. 

not  looking  at,  but  touching — the  stock.  In  the 
days  when  cards  were  not  so  well  manufactured 
as  now,  it  is  easy  to  understand  that  a  pack  might 
frequently  contain  marked  cards,  and,  therefore,  no 
one  was  allowed  even  to  touch  the  stock  without 
penalty. 

In  cutting  for  deal,  "  whichsoever  of  the  two 
dips  the  least  card  "  deals.  The  deal  was  either 
by  two  at  a  time,  or  by  three  or  four  at  a  time, 
to  each  player,  at  the  option  of  the  dealer;  but 
he  was  bound  to  continue  dealing  through  the 
game  as  he  began,  or,  at  least,  to  announce, 
before  the  cut,  that  he  would  change  his  method. 
The  same  object  is  apparent  here  as  before,  viz., 
that  no  advantage  should  be  taken  of  a  marked 
card.  Twelve  cards  were  given  to  each  player, 
and  twelve  were  left  in  the  stock,  of  which  the 
elder  hand  might  take  eight,  the  younger,  four; 
each  player  being  bound  to  discard  one  card. 
With  thirty-six  cards  it  was  possible  for  both 
players  to  hold  a  carte  blanche,  and  this  case  is 
provided  for,  the  two  annulling  each  other.  The 
point  was  called  the  ruffe,  in  the  French  Treatise, 
ronfle.  The  description  of  the  way  of  counting 
the  point  explains  why  points  ending  in  a  four 
counted  one  less  than  the  number  of  cards.  The 
point  was  not  formerly  reckoned  by  cards  but  by 
tens  {dixaines) ;  and  "  For  every  Ten  that  he  can 
reckon,  he  is  to  set  up  One.  As,  for  example, 
for  Thirty,  he  is  to  reckon  Three,  for  Fourty, 
Foure:  and  so  upward.     Where,  by  the  way,  it  is 


PIQUET.  65 

to  be  noted,  that  you  are  to  reckon  as  much  for 
Thirty  five  as  for  Forty;  and  as  much  for  Forty 
five  as  for  Fifty:  and  so  of  the  rest:  but  for  thirty 
six,  thirty  seven.  Thirty  eight,  or  Thirty  nine,  you 
are  to  reckon  no  more  than  for  Thirty  five:  in 
like  manner  as  for  Thirty  one.  Thirty  two,  Thirty 
three  or  Thirty  four,  you  are  to  reckon  no  more 
than  for  Thirty."  When  the  game  came  to  be 
played  with  thirty-two  cards,  points  ending  in  a 
two  or  in  a  three  could  no  longer  be  held,  but 
those  ending  in  a  four  could,  and,  the  old  method 
of  reckoning  being  continued,  it  seemed  as  though 
a  point  ending  in  a  four  was  an  arbitrary  exception 
to  the  rule  of  reckoning  one  for  each  card. 

A  curious  expression  is  used  in  respect  of  the 
highest  sequence  making  good  all  lower  ones  in 
the  same  hand,  notwithstanding  the  adversary  may 
hold  intermediate  ones.  The  best  sequence  is 
said  to  "  drown  "  all  the  sequences  held  by  the 
opponent.  Cards  under  a  ten  did  not  reckon  in 
play.  It  seems  that  in  Paris  it  was  permitted 
to  amend  incorrect  calls  of  point  or  sequence, 
but  not  in  Provence  or  Languedoc,  where  "  the 
First  word  is  alwaies  to  stand." 

A  few  years  later  was  published  "Z<2  Maison 
Academique"  (Paris.  1654.),  in  which  appears  "Zi? 
lev  dv  Picqvef^  as  then  played.  The  general 
directions  for  play  are  almost  identical  with  those 
in  '■'■Le  Royal  lev  dv  FiqveL" 

That  Piquet  was  much  played  in  France  about 
this  time  is  made  evident  by  the  publication  of 

F 


66  PIQUET. 

these  books,  by  its  repeated  mention  in  Molibre's 
plays,  and  by  its  having  been  chosen  as  the  title  of 
the  ballet,  already  referred  to. 

'■'■  Les  Fijcheux"  by  Moli^re  (1661.),  contains  an 
interesting  Piquet  hand,  which  deserves  more  than 
a  passing  notice.  The  description,  freely  trans- 
lated, runs  thus: — 


"Console  me,  Marquis,  for  the  extraordinary  partie  at 
Piquet  I  lost  yesterday  against  St.  Bouvain,  a  man  to  whom 
I  could  deal  and  give  fifteen  points.  It  is  a  maddening 
coup  which  crushes  me,  and  which  makes  me  wish  all 
players  at  the  devil ; — a  coup  enough  to  make  a  man  go 
and  hang  himself.  I  only  wanted  two  points;  he  required 
a  pique.  I  dealt;  he  proposed  a  fresh  deal.  I,  having 
pretty  good  cards  in  all  suits,  refused.  He  takes  six  cards. 
Now  observe  my  bad  luck  :  I  carry  ace  of  clubs ;  ace,  king, 
knave,  ten,  eight  of  hearts;  and  throw  out  (as  I  considered 
it  best  to  keep  my  point),  king,  queen  of  diamonds,  and 
queen,  ten  of  spades.  I  took  in  the  queen  to  my  point, 
which  made  me  a  quint  major.  To  my  amazement,  my 
adversary  showed  the  ace  and  a  sixieme  minor  in  diamonds, 
the  suit  of  which  I  had  discarded  king  and  queen.  But,  as 
he  required  a  pique,  I  was  not  alarmed,  expecting  to  make 
at  least  two  points  in  play.  In  addition  to  his  seven  dia- 
monds he  had  four  spades,  and,  playing  them,  he  put  me  to 
a  card,  for  I  did  not  know  which  of  my  aces  to  keep.  I 
thought  it  best  to  throw  the  ace  of  hearts,  but  he  had  dis- 
carded all  his  four  clubs,  and  capoted  me  with  the  six  of 
hearts !  I  was  so  vexed  I  could  not  say  a  word.  Confound 
it !  why  do  I  have  such  frightful  luck?" 


Supplying  the  unnamed  cards,  St.  Bouvain's 
hand  would  be  knave,  ten,  nine,  eight,  seven, 
six   of  diamonds;    king,    queen,    nine,    seven    of 


PIQUET.  67 

clubs ;  and  nine,  seven  of  hearts.  He  discards 
the  four  clubs  and  the  two  hearts ;  he  takes  in 
ace  of  diamonds ;  six  of  hearts ;  and  ace,  king, 
knave,  eight  of  spades. 

Alcippe  (his  adversary),  deals  himself  king, 
queen  of  diamonds ;  queen,  ten  of  spades ;  ace, 
king,  knave,  ten,  eight  of  hearts ;  and  ace,  knave, 
eight  of  clubs.  He  discards  the  diamonds,  spades, 
and  knave,  eight  of  clubs ;  he  takes  in  nine,  seven, 
six  of  spades ;  queen  of  hearts ;  and  ten,  six  of 
clubs. 

St.  Bouvain's  point  and  sixieme  are  good  for 
twenty-three ;  he  plays  the  diamonds  and  spades, 
which  include  six  counting  cards,  making  him 
twenty-nine ;  and  there  is  one  card  to  be  played, 
Alcippe  reckons  nothing,  and  has  to  play  eleven 
cards.  He  must  keep  either  ace  of  hearts  or  ace 
of  clubs.  He  elects  to  keep  the  club.  St.  Bouvain 
wins  the  last  trick  with  the  six  of  hearts  (this  is  a 
non-counting  card;  but,  if  it  wins,  it  reckons  one 
for  the  last  trick),  and  piques  and  capots  his 
opponent. 

Moliere  has  skilfully  heaped  up  the  various 
small  worries  that  may  annoy  an  irritable  player 
during  a  hand.  The  score  is  one  source  of  an- 
noyance : — St.  Bouvain  wants  a  pique,  Alcippe 
only  wants  two  points,  and  has  such  cards  that, 
though  a  pique  is  not  impossible  it  is  in  the 
highest  degree  improbable.  As  Fielding  ("Tom 
Jones ")  truly  remarks,  "  The  gamester  who  loses 
a  party  at  Piquet  by  a  single  point,  laments  his 
F  2 


68  PIQUET. 

bad  luck  ten  times  as  much  as  he  who  never  came 
within  a  prospect  of  the  game."  Again,  Alcippe 
has  the  chance  offered  him  of  a  fresh  deal,  which 
implies  that  his  adversary  has  very  bad  cards. 
Tiie  fresh  deal  is  refused,  and,  notwithstanding, 
St.  Bouvain  wins.  Then  the  elder  hand,  having  a 
right  to  take  eight  cards,  only  takes  six,  which  is 
a  disagreeable  surprise  after  proposing  a  fresh 
deal,  as  Alcippe  would  naturally  wonder  how  it 
could  be  that,  notwithstanding  the  bad  hand, 
St.  Bouvain  can  afford  to  leave  two  cards ;  and, 
lastly,  Alcippe  is  put  to  a  card,  which  is  by  no 
means  pleasant  at  any  time,  but  is  most  unpleasant 
of  all  to  a  player  with  two  aces,  who  only  requires 
one  trick  to  win  the  partie,  and  who  loses  it  if  he 
keeps  the  wrong  one. 

Alcippe,  though  he  boasts  his  superior  play,  and 
declares  that  he  lost  by  bad  luck,  really  makes  two 
mistakes  which  lose  him  the  game.  First,  he  does 
not  discard  to  the  score.  His  game,  when  wanting 
to  score  only  two,  is  to  protect  himself  from  a 
capot  by  throwing  out  his  point.  If  he  discards 
ace,  knave,  ten,  eight  of  hearts,  and  knave,  eight 
of  clubs,  he  is  morally  certain  to  win.  Next,  he 
plays  badly  in  throwing  the  ace  of  hearts.  It  is 
evident  that,  in  order  to  save  the  game,  St.  Bou- 
vain's  last  card  must  be  a  non- counting  card. 
Now,  he  may  hold  any  one  of  three  non-counting 
hearts,  or  either  of  two  non-counting  clubs.  This 
being  so,  it  is  three  to  two  in  favour  of  keeping  the 
heart 


PIQUET.  69 

In  1676  was  produced  "Z^  Trioinphe  des Dames" 
with  the  ballet  interlude,  about  which  so  much  has 
been  written  by  Piquet  historians.  As  it  has  often 
been  stated  that  this  play  was  never  printed,  it  may 
be  as  well  to  give  the  title  and  publisher's  name  in 
full :— 

"Le  Trio?nphe  des  Dames.  Comcdic  nicslce  d'  Omat?ienis 
avec  Explication  ou  Combat  h  la  Barriere  et  de  toides  les 
Devises,  par  77i.[oinas]  Corneille,  reprcse^itee  par  la  Trouppe 
du  Roy.  Etallie  au  Fourboii7-g  S.  Germain.  Paris.  Jean 
Ribon.      1676." 

The  '■'■Theatre  Francois''''  describes  the  ballet 
thus : — 

"■En  j6'j6,  on  7-epresettta  stir  le  Thedtre  de  V Hotel 
Guhiegaud  tine  Comedie  de  Thomas  Corneille,  en  cinq 
actes,  intitulee  le  Triomphe  des  Dames,  qui  n'a  point  He 
impritnee,  ^f  dont  le  Ballet  du  Jeu  de  Piquet  etoit  un  des 
Intermedes.  *  *  *  Les  Rois,  les  Dames  &>  les  Valets, 
apri's  avoir  forme,  par  leurs  danses,  des  tierces  et  des  qua- 
torzes ;  aprh  s'etre  rattgJs,  ious  les  noirs  d\i7i  cote,  dr'  les 
rouges  de  V autre,  fi^ii^-cnt  par  im  contre-danse,  ou  toutes  les 
couleurs  etoient  melees  confuscment,  et  sans  suite  J''' 

^'■La  Maison  Academigue"  after  several  editions, 
gave  place  to  the  more  comprehensive  '^Academic 
Universelle  des  Jeiix."  This  work,  variously  edited 
and  augmented,  was  the  French  authority  on  games 
for  about  a  century  and  a  half.  The  later  editions 
are  mainly  reprints  of  the  previous  ones  ;  and, 
probably  owing  to  the  book's  not  keeping  pace 
with  the  times,  it  gradually  lost  its  prestige. 
Modern    ^'Academies "    there    are    still ;    but  they 


70  PIQUET. 

are  no  more  like  the  older  ones  than  modern 
"Hoyles"  are  like  the  "Short  Treatises"  of 
Hoyle. 

The  Academies,  properly  so  called,  nearly  all 
agree  on  two  points.  They  give  Piquet  the  first 
or  second  place  among  card  games ;  and  they 
derive  a  good  deal  of  their  Piquet  inspiration 
from  "Ze?  Royal  lev  dv  Fiqvet." 

The  French  Acadcmie  was  translated  into  Eng- 
lish about  176S.  The  title  of  the  book  is  : — "The 
Academy  of  Play ;  Containing  a  full  Description 
of;  and  the  Laws  of  Play,  Now  observed  in  the 
several  Academies  of  Paris,  Relative  to  The  fol- 
lowing Games,  viz.  [Here  follow  the  names  of 
thirty-three  card  games.]  From  the  French  of  the 
Abb^  Bellecour.  London :  Printed  for  F.  Newbery, 
the  Corner  of  St.  PatiVs  Church-Yard,  Ludgate- 
Street" 

The  preface  says,  "The  Game  of  Piquet  is 
*  *  *  here  treated  in  a  manner  more  clear, 
and  more  conformable  to  the  present  Practice,  as 
in  all  the  Rules  here  given,  we  have  followed  the 
Determinations  of  the  most  able  Players." 

The  "  Determinations  of  the  most  able  Players  " 
enable  the  reader  to  trace  the  origin  of  the  proverb 
that  "  Piquet  is  not  a  game  of  surprise,"  a  saying 
not  always  true  of  the  game.  It  refers  to  changing 
the  suit  when  playing  the  cards  : — 

"You  have  to  observe  that  as  there  is  no  advantage  to  be 
taken  by  surprize,  at  the  Game  of  Piquet  he  that  in 
playing,  changes  his  Suit,  is  to  name  the  Suit  in  which  he 


PIQUET.  7 1 

then  leads ;  in  default  of  which,  the  other  Party,  supposing 
that  he  still  continues  to  lead  in  the  former  Suit,  has  a  right 
to  take  up  the  Card  that  he  has  played,  even  tho'  it  should 
be  in  the  Suit  in  which  he  then  leads." 

And  this  is  the  penalty,  when  "  surprises "  of  a 
more  serious  nature  are  detected  : — 

' '  Qui  7-eprend  des  cartes  dans  son  ecart,  est  surpris  a  en 
changer,  ou  fait  (Tautres  tours  de  frip07t,  perd  la  partie,  ct 
doit  etre  chasse  comme  tin  coquin  avec  qui  oti  ne  doit  plus 
jouer.  La  peine  de  cet  article  ne  saurait  etre  assez  forte, 
puisque  c'est  pour punir  unfripon  avere.^^ 

This  is  quaintly  translated  as  follows  : — 

"He  who  takes  in  any  part  of  his  Discard,  or  is  detected 
in  changing  his  Cards,  or  in  any  other  kind  of  fraud  ;  loses 
the  party,  and  ought  to  be  drove  out  as  a  cheat ;  with  whom 
no  one  ought  to  play. 

The  punishment  here  cannot  be  sufficiently  severe,  as  it  is 
intended  to  chastise  a  7nanifest  scoundrel." 

The  only  points  of  importance  in  which  the 
Abbe's  "Academy"  differs  from  "The  Royall  and 
delightfull  game  of  Picquet ",  (the  same  alterations 
being  present  in  the  corresponding  French  editions), 
are  that  thirty-two  cards  are  substituted  for  thirty- 
six,  and  consequently  that  the  number  taken  after 
discarding  is  five  instead  of  eight  elder  hand,  and 
three  instead  of  four  younger  hand:  that  dealing  by 
four  cards  at  a  time  is  no  longer  permitted ;  that 
the  ronfle  or  ruffe  is  called  the  point ;  that  some- 
times every  card  of  the  point  is  allowed  to  reckon; 


72  PIQUET. 

and  that  the  counting  in  play  of  cards  below  a  ten 
is  optional. 

The  above  changes  in  the  mode  of  play  were 
introduced  about  the  end  of  the  seventeenth 
century. 

Piquet,  according  to  popular  belief,  was  imported 
into  England  from  France. 

"Vat  have  you  oi  gi-and  plaisi7-  in  dis  towne, 
Vidout  it  come  from  France,  dat  vill  go  down  ? 
Picquet,  basset;  your  vin,  your  dress,  your  dance  ; 
'Tis  all  you  see,  tout  a  la  mode  de  Fra7ice." 

— Farquhar. 
Epilogue  to  "  Sir  Harry  Wildair"  (1701). 

But,  as  has  been  seen,  the  game  first  came  to 
this  country  as  Cent ;  and  there  is  nothing  to  show 
whether  it  was  of  French  or  of  Spanish  importation. 

Be  this  as  it  may.  Cent  was  deposed  in  England, 
in  favour  of  Piquet,  about  the  middle  of  the  seven- 
teenth century.  One  of  the  earliest  writers  to  refer 
to  Piquet  under  its  new  name  is  John  Hall,  in  his 
"  Horse  Vacivse "  (1646).  He  says: — -"For  Cardes, 
the  Philologil  of  them  is  not  for  an  essay ;  a  man's 
fancy  would  be  sum'd  up  at  Cribbidge ;  Gleeke  re- 
quires a  vigilant  memory :  Maw,  a  pregnant  agility ; 
Picket  a  various  invention ;  Primero,  a  dexterous 
kinde  of  rashness." 

In  1659,  a  curious  pamphlet  (now  rare)  was 
published,  entitled, — "  Shufling,  Cutting,  and  Deal- 
ing, in  A  Game  at  Pickquet :  being  Acted  from  the 


PIQUET.  73 

Year,  1653.  to  1658.  By  O.  P.  [Oliver  Protector] 
And  others;  With  great  Applause."  It  represents 
Cromwell,  after  the  Long  Parliament,  playing  cards 
with  some  old  officers,  friends,  and  opponents,  the 
players  expressing  their  political  sentiments  through 
allusions  to  the  game  of  Piquet : — ■ 

"Oliver  P.  I  am  like  to  have  a  good  beginning  on't : 
I  have  thrown  out  all  my  best  Cards,  and  got  none  but 
a  Company  of  Wretched  ones;  so  I  may  very  well  be 
capetted  [capoted]." 

One  of  the  characters  says,  "  I  am  nothing  but 
a  Ruff"  {j-onfle  or  point).  Another,  "I  got  more 
the  last  Game  when  I  plaid  Cent :  for  I  had  a 
hundred,  and  all  made." 

A  similar  squib  was  published  in  '■^  MehiJiges 
Historiques  de  Bois  Jourdain  ",  some  half  century 
later.  It  alludes  to  the  state  of  France  on  the 
accession  of  Louis  XV,  The  following  is  a  speci- 
men : — 

"Le  Jeu  de  Piquet,  1716.  Les  Exiles — Un  qiiatorze 
de  roi  [Louis  XIV.]  avait  gate  7iotre  jeu ;  une  quititc  de  roi 
[Louis  XV.]  le  retid plus  beau." 

In  "The  Wild  Gallant"  (1662.),  Dryden's  first 
acted  play,  there  is  drawn  the  singular  picture  of  a 
man  playing  Piquet  against  an  imaginary  adversary, 
who  however  arrives  in  time  to  pick  up  the  stakes  : — 

"A  Table  set  with  Cards  upon  it. 

Trice.  *  *  ♦  Ay,  it  shall  be  he:  Jack  Loveby,  what 
think'st  thou  of  a  game  at  Piquet,  we  two  hand  to  fist?    You 


74  PIQUET. 

and  I  will  play  one  single  game  for  ten  pieces  :  'Tis  deep 
stake,  Jack,  but  'tis  all  one  between  us  two  :  You  shall  deal, 
Jack  : — Who  I,  Mr.  Justice?  That's  a  good  one  ;  you  must 
give  me  use  for  your  hand  then;  that's  six  i'  the  hundred. 
[The  advantage  of  the  deal  was  formerly  estimated  at  about 
seven  points  in  a  hundred.] — Come,  lift,  lift ; — mine's  a  ten; 
Mr.  Justice  : — Mine's  a  king  ;  oh,  ho,  Jack,  you  deal.  I 
have  the  advantage  of  this,  i'  faith,  if  I  can  keep  it.  {fie 
deals  twelve  apiece,  two  by  two,  and  looks  on  his  own  cards. ) 
I  take  seven,  and  look  on  this — Now  for  you.  Jack  Loveby. 

Enter  Loveby,  behind. 

Lov.   How's  this  ?     Am  I  the  man  he  fights  with  ? 

Trice.  I'll  do  you  right.  Jack;  As  I  am  an  honest  man, 
you  must  discard  this  ;  There's  no  other  way  :  If  you  were 
my  own  brother,  I  could  do  no  better  for  you. — Zounds,  the 
rogue  has  a  quint-major,  and  three  aces  younger  hand. — 
{Looks  071  the  other  cards.)  Stay  ;  What  am  I  for  the  point  ? 
But  bare  forty,  and  he  fifty-one  :  fifteen,  and  five  for  the 
point,  twenty,  and  three  by  aces,  twenty-three ;  Well,  I  am 
to  play  first :  one,  twenty-three ;  two,  twenty-three  ;  three, 
twenty-three  ;  four,  twenty-three  ;  now  I  must  play  into  his 
hand  :  five  :  now  you  take  it.  Jack  ; — -five,  twenty-four, 
twenty-five,  twenty-six,  twenty-seven,  twenty-eight,  twenty- 
nine,  thirty  and  the  cards  forty. 

Lov.   \aside'\  Hitherto  it  goes  well  on  my  side. 

Trice.  Now  I  deal :  How  many  do  you  take.  Jack  ?  All. 
Then  I  am  gone  :  what  a  rise  is  here  ?  Fourteen  by  aces, 
and  a  sixieme-major ;  I  am  gone,  without  looking  into  my 
cards. — [Takes  up  aft  ace  and  bites  it.)  Ay,  I  thought  so: 
If  ever  man  play'd  with  such  cursed  fortune,  I'll  be  hanged, 
and  all  for  want  of  this  damned  ace. — There's  your  ten  pieces, 
you  rooking,  beggarly  rascal  as  you  are. 

Loveby  enters. 

Lov.  What  occasion  have  I  given  you  for  these  words. 
Sir?  Rook  and  Rascal!  I  am  no  more  rascal  than  your- 
self, Sir  ! 

Trice.  How's  this?     How's  this? 


PIQUET.  75 

Lov.  And  though  for  this  time  I  put  it  up  because  I  am  a 
winner — [Snatches  the  gold. ) 

Trice.  What  a  devil  dost  thou  put  up  ?  Not  my  gold,  I 
hope,  Jack  ? 

Lov.  By  your  favour,  but  I  do  ;  and  'twas  won  fairly  :  a 
sixieme,  and  fourteen  aces,  by  your  own  confession." 

In  "  Flora's  Vagaries,"  a  comedy  printed  in  1670, 
Piquet  is  again  introduced  : — 

"Grimani.  Well,  lay  by  your  work,  we  will  have  a  game 
at  cards.  Giacomo,  go  fetch  some  cards  and  counters, 
picket  you  play  well  at. 

Otrante  [his  daughter].  I  am  no  Gamester,  but  if  you 
please  to  play — 

****** 

Gri.   Sit  down,  come,  lift,  I  deal.     How  many  take  you  in? 
Otr.   I  take  seven,  Sir. 

Gri.  Take  them  and  I  will  have  all  the  rest.  So  now, 
what  say  you  to  the  point  ? 

Otr.  a  little  game,  some  three-and-fifty. 
Gri.  'Tis  good,  hunch  out. 
Otr.  Quart  major. 
Gri.  And  that  too. 

**♦«*» 
Otr.  Three  kings. 
Gri.  No,  that's  not  good. 

Otr.  Nine,  and  there's  ten,  eleven,  twelve,  thirteen. 
Gri.   I  had  forgot  my  aces. 

****** 

Otr.  You  have  lost  you  aces,  fourteen." 

The  action  of  the  play  then  causes  the  game 
to  stop. 

It  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  score  was 
marked  with  counters,  and  that  the  mode  of  play 
was  as  now,  except  that  the  pack  was  composed 


76  PIQUET. 

of  thirty-six  cards,  otherwise  Otrante  could  not 
take  seven  cards,  and  could  not  have  a  point  of 
fifty-three,  as  with  a  thirty-two  card  pack  this  point 
cannot  be  made.  (See  pp.  63-65,  for  an  account 
of  the  old  mode  of  playing.) 

The  occurrence  of  Piquet  in  dramatic  and  other 
writings  of  this  jDcriod  is  very  common. 

About  this  time  appeared,  "Wit's  Interpreter:  the 
English  Parnassus."  The  third  edition,  with  many 
additions,  by  "J.  C",  is  dated  1671.  One  part  con- 
taining "  Games  and  Sports  now  us'd  at  this  day 
among  the  Gentry  of  England,  (Sec",  has  instruc- 
tions for  playing  "The  Ingenious  Game  called 
Picket."  Picket  is  also  included  among  the  card 
games  in  Cotton's  "Compleat  Gamester"  (1674). 
In  both  cases  "  The  Royall  and  delightfuU  game  of 
Picquet "  has  been  plagiarised.  In  the  edition  of 
"The  Compleat  Gamester"  of  1709  a  note  is  added, 
that  "These  were  the  Rules  of  the  Game  when 
it  was  play'd  with  the  sixes,  but  however  the  Rules 
hold  for  the  Game  as  it  is  play'd  at  present  without 
the  Sixes,  only  when  it  is  play'd  without  the  Sixes 
the  Elder  Hand  is  to  take  Five  of  the  Eight  Cards 
in  the  Stock."  This  fixes  the  time  when  the  altera- 
tion of  the  pack  became  generally  recognised  in 
England. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century, 
card-playing  was  the  rage  in  all  parts  of  Europe. 
The  games  most  in  favour,  with  people  of  fashion 
in  England,  were  Ombre,  Piquet  and  Basset 
(now  called  Faro).      In   "The   Confederacy"  by 


PIQUET.  77 

Vanbrugh  (1705),  Clarissa  exclaims,  "We'll  play 
at  Ombre,  Piquet,  Basset,  and  so  forth,  and  close 
the  evening  with  a  handsome  supper  and  ball." 
Other  games  are  referred  to,  but  not  so  frequently. 
In  "Sir  Harry  Wildair,"  (1701),  for  example,  the 
following  conversation  occurs  : — 

"Sir  Harry.  The  capot  at  Piquet,  the  paroli  at  Basset, 
and  then  Ombre  !    Who  can  resist  the  charms  of  Matadores  ? 

Lady  Lurewell.  Ay,  Sir  Harry  ;  and  then  the  sept  le 
va  !     Quinze  le  va  !     Treiite  le  va  !  [Basset]. 

Sir  H.  Right,  right.  Madam  ! 

Lady  Lure.  Then  the  nine  of  diamonds  at  Comet  [Pope 
Joan],  three  fives  at  Cribbage,  and  Pam  [Knave  of  Clubs]  in 
Lanterloo  [Loo],  Sir  Harry  ! 

Sir  H.  Ay,  Madam,  these  are  charms  indeed.  Then  the 
pleasure  of  picking  your  husband's  pocket  over  night  to  play 
at  Basset  next  day." 

About  this  date  Piquet  is  sometimes  spelt 
Piquette,  as  though  the  idea  had  gained  ground 
that  the  word  is  a  diminutive  oi  piq7ie  (see  p.  52). 
The  first  volume  of  Thomas  D'Urfey's  celebrated 
poems,  "  Wit  and  Mirth  :  or  Pills  to  purge  Melan- 
choly," (1719.),  contains  "A  Poole  at  Piquette,  The 
Words  made  and  set  to  a  Tune,  by  Mr.  D'Urfey, 
made  at  Ramsbury  Mannor." 

"  Within  an  Arbour  of  delight, 

As  sweet  as  Bowers  Elisian 
Where  famous  Sidmy  us'd  to  write 

I  lately  had  a  Vision  : 
Methought  beneath  a  Golden  State, 

The  Turns  of  Chance  obeying, 
Six  of  the  World's  most  noted  great, 

At  Piquette  were  a  playing. 


78  PIQUET. 

"The  first  two  were  the  brave  Eugene 

With  Vcndosvie  Battle  waging  ; 
The  next  a  Nymph  who  to  be  Queen, 

Her  Mounsieur  was  Engaging  ; 
The  Fleur  de  Lis  Old  Maintcnon 

With  sanctified  Carcro ; 
And  next  above  the  scarlet  Don, 

Queen  Anne,  and  Gallick  Nero. 
"The  Game  between  the  Martial  braves, 

Was  held  in  diff'rent  Cases  ; 
The  French  man  got  Quatorze  of  Knaves, 

But  Prince  Eugene  four  Aces  : 
And  tho'  the  'tothers  eldest  Hand 

Gave  Hopes  to  make  a  Jest  on 't, 
Yet  now  the  Point  who  soonest  gain'd 

Could  only  get  the  best  on 't. 
"From  them  I  turned  mine  Eyes  to  see 

The  Church  man  and  the  Lady, 
And  found  her  pleas'd  to  high  degree 

Her  Fortune  had  been  steady, 
The  Saints  that  cram'd  the  Spanish  Purse 

She  hop'd  would  all  oblige  her. 
For  he  had  but  a  little  Teise 

When  she  produc'd  Quint-Major. 
"And  now  betwixt  the  King  and  Queen 

An  Empire  was  depending  ; 
Within  whose  mighty  Game  was  seen 

The  Art  of  State-contending  : 
The  Mounsieur  had  three  Kings  to  win't 

And  was  o'er  Europe  roaming, 
But  her  full  Point  Quatorze  and  Quint 

Won  all  and  left  him  foaming." 

Again,  in  Pope's  "  Moral  Essays  in  four  Epistles," 
(1733.),  in  the  first  of  which  the  character  of  Lord 
Godolphin  is  sketched,  it  is  stated  that 

"  His  pride  is  in  Piquette, 
Newmarket  fame,  and  judgment  in  a  bet." 


PIQUET.  79 

In  1 7 19  Richard  Seymour  published  "The 
Court  Gamester :  or  full  and  easy  Instructions 
for  +  *  *  Ombre,  Picquet,  and  the  Royal  Game 
of  Chess."  Much  of  the  Piquet  is  derived  from 
the  original  source ;  but  there  are  considerable 
additions,  and  quaint  remarks  peculiar  to  this 
treatise  which  deserve  quotation.  Speaking  of 
tierces  and  other  sequences,  Seymour  observes, 
"These  Terms  may  sound  a  little  like  conjuring, 
to  Persons  that  don't  understand  them  ;  but  they 
are  only  the  Fretich  Terms  that  we  ijiake  use  of, 
because  we  have  not  English  whereby  to  express 
the  same  thing  in  one  Word."  Further  on,  after 
explaining  the  annulling  of  minor  sequences  by 
major  ones,  he  adds,  "  Thus,  among  Cards  as 
well  as  Men,  the  Great  still  overcome  the  Small." 

The  directions  are  repeated  in  seven  editions 
up  to  1750;  in  the  fifth  edition  it  is  stated  that 
"Piquet  is  now  become  so  common  that  even 
the  meanest  people  have  become  instructed,  and 
let  into  all  the  Tricks  and  Secrets  of  it."  This, 
however,  is  doubtful,  for  though  Piquet  was  much 
played  in  the  clubs,  and  in  fashionable  society, 
in  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century,  it  never 
appears,  in  this  country,  to  have  been  the  game 
of  the  masses,  as  it  is  in  France. 

Apropos  of  club  play,  about  this  time,  a  story 
is  told  in  Walpole's  "  Letters  "  of  Selwyn's  walking 
into  White's,  in  November,  1752,  where  he  found 
James  Jeffries  playing  Piquet  with  Sir  Edward 
Falkener,  who  was  at  that  time  Joint  Postmaster- 


8o  PIQUET. 

General.  "  Oh,"  quoth  Sehvyn,  "  he  is  now- 
robbing  the  mail ! " 

The  "  Court  Gamester "  was  eventually  amal- 
gamated with  the  "Compleat  Gamester";  and, 
in  the  eighth  edition  (1754)  a  number  of  Hoyle's 
rules  and  cases  are  plagiarised. 

Bath  was  the  head  quarters  of  fashionable  card- 
playing  about  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  cen- 
tury. It  is  related  of  a  notorious  gambler,  named 
Lookup,  that  he  won  large  sums  of  money  of  Lord 
Chesterfield,  chiefly  at  Piquet,  and  that,  with  his 
winnings,  he  built  some  houses  at  Bath,  which  he 
jocularly  called  "  Chesterfield  Row."  Lookup  died 
in  1770,  with  cards  in  his  hand,  while  playing  the 
game  of  humbug,  or  two-handed  whist.  Foote, 
on  hearing  this,  said,  "  Lookup  is  humbugged  out 
of  the  world  at  last." 

The  Bath  play  continued  until  about  the  year 
1S40,  a  coterie  of  distinguished  Piquet  players 
constantly  meeting  there  during  the  early  part  of 
the  present  century  ;  and  the  club  play  continued 
at  White's  and  Graham's.  When  the  Bath  play 
declined,  and  Graham's  club  was  broken  up,  Piquet 
pretty  well  died  out  in  England,  almost  the  only 
place  where  it  was  regularly  played  being  the  Port- 
land Club.  Recently  Piquet  has  revived ;  and  it 
is  now  (1890)  so  much  played  in  England,  that  it 
may  be  called  a  popular  game. 

The  last  work  on  the  game  which  calls  for  notice 
here  is  Hoyle's  "  Short  Treatise  on  the  Game  of 
Piquet."     (1744.)     This  is  original,  and  not,  like 


PIQUET.  O I 

the  others,  taken  from  the  older  books.  Though 
somewhat  obscure  in  style,  it  contains  much  valu- 
able instruction,  and  also  the  laws  of  the  game, 
which  were  the  only  authority  in  this  country  until 
the  code  of  the  Portland  Club  was  published  in 
1873.  Hoyle's  laws  were  twenty-six  in  number, 
and  were  all  observed  by  strict  players.  Editors 
of  Hoyle,  however,  subsequent  to  1800,  took  the 
liberty  of  adding  nine  other  laws  on  their  own 
account.  These  added  laws  had  no  weight,  and, 
in  several  instances,  the  practice  of  club  players 
was  opposed  to  them. 

Hoyle  does  not  fix  the  number  the  game  is 
to  be  played  up,  probably  because  it  was  still  a 
matter  of  agreement  in  his  day.  His  editors, 
however,  in  copies  published  after  Hoyle's  death, 
say  the  game  is  a  hundred-and-one  up.  Piquet 
au  cent  is  played  a  hundred-and-one  up  in  some 
parts  of  France  at  the  present  day  (1873);  but 
the  practice  in  this  country,  and  in  Paris  when 
Piquet  mi  cent  is  played,  is  to  make  the  game  a 
hundred  up.  Piquet  ati  cent  is  now  (1885),  how- 
ever, almost  entirely  superseded  by  the  Rubicon 
Game.  The  introduction  of  this  form  of  Piquet 
necessitated  the  redrawing  of  the  Portland  code. 
In  this  task  the  Turf  Club  assisted ;  and,  since 
1882,  the  joint  code  of  these  two  clubs  has  ruled 
the  game  among  English  players. 

It  is  somewhat  remarkable  that  so  fine  a  game 
as  Piquet  should  have  been  almost  entirely  neg- 
lected by  writers  on  games  from  1744  to  1873 
G 


82  PIQUET. 

(nearly  a  hundred-and-thirty  years),  except  by 
editors  of  Iloyle.  This  is  the  more  singular,  as 
it  is  generally  admitted  that  Hoyle's  laws  and 
directions  for  play,  though  excellent  as  far  as 
they  go,  are  by  no  means  complete.  In  the 
following  pages  an  attempt  has  been  made  to 
supplement  Hoyle's  work,  by  giving  a  full  de- 
scription of  the  modern  game  (Piquet  au  cent 
being  now  seldom  played),  and  by  enlarging 
more  thoroughly  on  the  various  points  of  play. 


^^<^^ 


DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  OAME. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

The  Game  of  Piquet  is  played  by  two  persons, 
with  a  pack  of  thirty-two  cards — the  sixes,  fives, 
fours,  threes,  and  twos,  being  thrown  out  from  a 
complete  pack.  It  is  convenient  to  have  two 
packs,  each  being  used  alternately. 

DEALING. 

The  players  cut  for  deal.  The  highest  has 
choice.  The  order  of  the  cards,  both  in  cutting, 
and  in  calling  and  playing,  is  ace  (highest),  king, 
queen,  knave,  ten,  nine,  eight,  seven  (lowest). 

The  pack  is  then  cut  by  the  non-dealer,  or 
elder  hand,  to  the  dealer,  or  younger  hand,  who 
re-unites  the  packets  and  gives  the  top  two  cards 
to  his  adversary,  the  next  two  to  himself,  and  so 
on,  dealing  two  cards  at  a  time  to  each  player, 
until  they  have  twelve  cards  a-piece.  Or,  the  deal 
may  be  by  three  at  a  time.  The  dealer  pjlaces 
the  undealt  cards  (called  the  stock),  eight  in 
number,  face  downwards  on  the  table  between  the 
players.     {See  also  Laws   1-17,  pp.  1-3.) 

DISCARDING. 

The  players  then  look  at  their  hands  and  pro- 
ceed  to   discard,   i.e.,   to  put   out   such   cards   as 

G2 


84  PIQUET. 

they  deem  advisable  (but  see  carte  blanche,  p.  95). 
They  then  take  in  an  equivalent  number  of  cards 
from  the  stock.  The  elder  hand  has  the  privilege 
of  thus  exchanging  five  of  his  cards.  He  may 
take  any  less  number,  but  he  must  exchange  one. 
He  separates  his  discard  from  his  hand,  places  it 
aside,  face  downwards  on  the  table,  and  takes 
from  the  top  of  the  stock  the  number  of  cards 
discarded. 

If  the  elder  hand  takes  all  his  five  cards  he 
leaves  three  for  the  younger  hand.  If  he  discards 
less  than  five  cards  (leaving  more  than  three  in 
the  stock)  he  announces  the  fact  by  saying,  "  I 
only  take  four," — or  three,  or  less,  as  the  case 
may  be ;  or,  "  I  leave  a  card," — or  two,  or  more 
cards,  as  the  case  may  be. 

When  the  elder  hand  discards  less  than  five 
cards  he  is  entitled  to  look  at  the  cards  he 
leaves.  For  example :  If  he  discards  four  cards, 
he  takes  the  top  four  cards  of  the  stock,  and 
looks  at  the  fifth,  the  one  left  on  the  top  of  the 
stock  after  he  has  taken  his  four.  If  he  discards 
but  three  cards,  he  may  similarly  look  at  the  two 
cards  left,  and  so  on.  He  returns  the  cards  thus 
looked  at  to  the  top  of  the  stock  without  showing 
them  to  his  adversary. 

The  younger  hand  has  the  privilege  of  discard- 
ing three  cards.     He  is  obliged  to  discard  one. 

If  the  elder  hand  has  left  any  of  his  cards, 
the  younger  hand  may  take  all  that  remain  in 
the    stock,   discarding    an    equal   number.     Thus, 


PIQUET.  85 

if  the  elder  hand  has  left  one  card,  the  younger 
may  take  four,  viz.,  the  one  left  and  his  own 
three.  He  separates  his  discard  from  his  hand, 
and  lays  it  aside  as  explained  in  respect  of  the 
elder  hand;  and,  in  a  similar  way,  takes  his  cards 
from  the  stock  after  the  elder  hand  has  taken  in. 

Whether  the  elder  hand  takes  all  his  cards  or 
not,  the  younger  hand  must  take  his  cards  from 
the  top  of  the  stock,  including  any  card  or  cards 
that  may  have  been  left  by  the  elder  hand.  For 
instance,  the  elder  hand  takes  four  cards;  the 
younger  hand  only  takes  two,  and  leaves  two 
cards.  He  must  take  the  card  left  by  the  elder 
hand  and  the  top  card  of  the  other  three,  and 
must  leave  the  bottom  two. 

If  the  younger  hand  leaves  any  cards,  he 
announces  the  number  left.  He  has  a  right  to 
look  at  cards  he  leaves,  at  any  time  before  he 
plays  to  the  first  trick,  but  not  afterwards.  He 
must  declare  whether  he  will  look  at  them  or  not 
as  soon  as  the  elder  hand  has  named  the  suit  he 
will  first  lead  (which  he  generally  does  by  leading 
a  card).  If  the  younger  hand  looks  at  them,  or 
at  any  of  them,  he  must  also  show  all  that  are  left 
to  the  elder  hand,  the  elder  hand  first  naming  the 
suit  he  will  lead.  If  the  younger  hand  elects  not 
to  look  at  the  cards  left,  the  elder  cannot  see  them. 

Cards  left  untaken,  and  not  looked  at,  must 
be  kept  separate  from  the  hands  and  discards. 

Each  player  may  look  at  his  own  discard  at 
any   time  during  the  play  of  the  hand ;    but  he 


86  PIQUET. 

must   keep   his   discard   separate    from    his  other 
cards.      {See  also  Laws   21-45,  PP-  4~8.) 

CALLING    AND    SHOWING. 

The  discarding  and  taking  in  being  over,  the 
players  next  announce  or  ea//  certain  combina- 
tions of  the  cards  in  hand,  and,  if  good,  score  for 
them.  These  combinations  are  point,  sequences, 
and  quatorzes  and  trios. 

The  point  must  be  announced  first  (Law  46). 
It  is  scored  by  the  player  who  calls  the  suit  of 
greatest  number.  If  each  player's  best  suit  con- 
tains an  equal  number  of  cards,  the  point  is  then 
scored  by  the  one  who  calls  the  suit  of  greatest 
strength,  according  to  the  following  way  of  valuing 
it : — The  ace  is  valued  at  eleven,  each  of  the  court 
cards  at  ten  a-piece,  and  the  other  cards  at  the 
number  of  pips  on  each. 

The  elder  hand  calls  his  point,  thus  : — Suppose 
his  best  suit  to  consist  of  five  cards.  He  would 
call,  "Five  cards."  If  the  younger  hand  has  no 
suit  of  equal  or  greater  number,  he  replies,  "Good." 
The  elder  hand  then  names  the  suit,  saying,  "  In 
spades,"  or  as  the  case  may  be,  and  counts  one 
for  each  card,  saying,  "  Five." 

If  the  point  called  by  the  elder  hand  happens 
to  be  equal  in  number  to  the  best  suit  of  his 
adversary,  the  younger  hand  says,  "Equal."  The 
elder  then  announces  the  value  of  his  cards. 
Thus : — -The  elder's  point  is  ace,  king,  knave, 
nine,    eight ;    he   would    say,    "  Forty  -  eight,"    or, 


PIQUET.  87 

"  Making  eight."  If  the  younger  hand's  five  cards 
make  less  than  forty-eight,  he  replies,  "  Good,"  and 
the  elder  then  names  the  suit.  If  the  younger 
hand's  point  makes  exactly  forty-eight,  he  says, 
"Equal."  The  elder  hand  then  names  the  suit 
in  which  his  equality  is,  but  does  not  count  any- 
thing for  it. 

If  the  younger  hand's  five  cards  make  more 
than  forty-eight,  he  says,  "  Not  good,"  and  the 
elder  hand  does  not  name  the  suit  he  called. 

If  the  younger  hand  has  a  point  consisting  of  a 
greater  number  of  cards  than  the  one  called  by 
his  adversary,  he  says,  "  Not  good,"  and  the  elder 
does  not  name  the  suit  he  called. 

When  the  younger  hand's  point  is  equal,  he 
names  the  suit  after  the  elder  has  finished  calling 
his  hand  and  has  led  a  card,  but  he  does  not 
count  anything  for  point.  If  the  younger  hand's 
point  is  good,  he  names  the  suit  and  reckons 
one  for  each  card  of  the  point  as  soon  as  the 
elder  has  led  a  card. 

A  player  calling  a  point  which  is  smaller  than 
his  best  suit,  can  correct  his  miscall  before  the 
younger  hand  has  answered,  "  Not  good,"  or, 
"  Equal." 

It  is  usual,  but  not  compulsory,  to  call  se- 
quences next  after  point ;  quatorze  or  trio  may 
be  called  before  sequence,  without  prejudice 
to  a  subsequent  call  of  sequence. 

The  elder  hand  should  first  call  his  best  sequence. 
Any  three  or  more  cards  of  the  same  suit  held  in 


88 


PIQUET. 


hand  in  tlie  order  given  at  p.  S3  constitute  a  se- 
quence. Sequences,  and  the  amounts  reckoned 
for  them  when  good,  are  as  under : — 


A  sequence  of  eight  cards 
,,  seven 

,,  six 

,,  five 

,,  four 

,,  three 


named  a  huitieme)  scores  eighteen. 


septieme) 
sixieme  ) 
quint  ) 
quart  ) 
tierce       ) 


seventeen. 

sixteen. 

fifteen. 

four. 

three. 


It  will  be  observed  that  tierces  and  quarts  reckon 
one  for  each  card ;  and  that  higher  sequences 
reckon  one  for  each  card,  with  ten  added. 

Sequences  are  further  defined  by  name  accord- 
ing to  the  card  which  heads  them.  Thus,  a 
sequence  of  king,  queen,  knave,  is  named  a  tierce 
to  a  king ;  ace,  king,  queen,  is  called  a  tierce 
major;  and  so  on  for  other  sequences  headed 
by  an  ace.  A  sequence  of  nine,  eight,  seven, 
is  called  a  tierce  minor ;  and  so  on  for  other 
sequences  of  the  lowest  cards. 

Whether  or  not  a  sequence  is  good  is  deter- 
mined by  {a)  the  number  of  cards  it  contains, 
and  by  {b)  the  highness  of  the  cards.  A  higher 
sequence  is  superior  to  or  good  against  a  lower 
one  containing  the  same  number  of  cards ;  but 
a  sequence  containing  a  greater  number  of  cards, 
even  though  low  ones,  is  good  against  a  higher 
sequence  containing  fewer  cards.  For  example  : — 
A  tierce  major  is  good  against  any  other  tierce; 
a  quart  minor  is  good  against  a  tierce  major. 


PIQUET.  09 

The  elder  hand,  when  calling  his  sequence, 
names  it  thus: — "A  quint  minor,"  "A  quart  to 
a  queen,"  or  whatever  it  may  be.  The  younger 
hand  says,  "Good,"  "Equal,"  or  "Not  good," 
as  in  the  case  of  the  point.  If  good  or  equal, 
the  elder  hand  then  names  the  suit  in  which 
his  sequence  is.  If  not  good,  the  younger  calls 
his  sequence,  and  names  the  suit  in  which  it  is, 
after  the  elder  has  finished  calling  and  has  led 
a  card. 

When  a  player  has  a  sequence  that  is  good,  he 
reckons  one  for  each  card  of  it,  and  an  additional 
ten  if  it  is  a  sequence  of  five  or  more  cards  {see 
p.  88).  The  player  whose  sequence  is  allowed  to 
be  good,  is  also  entitled  to  reckon  all  smaller 
sequences  in  his  hand,  notwithstanding  that  his 
adversary  holds  a  sequence  of  intermediate  value. 
For  example  : — A  has  a  quart  to  a  queen  (queen, 
knave,  ten,  nine)  in  one  suit  and  a  tierce  minor 
(nine,  eight,  seven)  in  another  suit ;  B  has  a  quart 
to  a  knave  (knave,  ten,  nine,  eight)  in  a  third 
suit.  A  calls  a  quart  to  a  queen,  which  is  good. 
He  scores  four  for  it,  and  then  calls  the  tierce 
minor,  and  scores  three  for  that.  B's  quart  to 
a  ten  counts  nothing,  and  does  not  prevent  A 
from  reckoning  the  tierce  minor. 

If  the  two  players'  sequences  are  equal,  the 
equality  is  called  by  both,  and  neither  scores 
anything  for  sequence,  even  though  one  player 
may  hold  a  second  sequence  of  equal  value,  or 
an  inferior  sequence.     The  equality  of  the  superior 


90  PIQUET. 

sequence  nullifies  the  whole.  Thus  :  —  A  calls 
1  tierce  major;  B  says,  "Equal."  A  and  B  are 
precluded  from  scoring  a  second  tierce  major  or 
any  smaller  sequence. 

If  the  elder  hand  inadvertently  calls  a  low  se- 
quence, holding  a  higher  one,  he  may  correct 
his  miscall  before  it  has  been  replied  to  by 
the  younger  hand.  After  the  younger  hand  has 
replied,  "  Good,"  or  "  Equal,"  the  elder  must 
abide  by  his  call,  and  can  only  reckon  sequences 
equal  to,  or  lower  than,  the  one  he  called.  Thus  : — 
A  has  a  quart  minor  and  a  tierce  minor.  If  he 
first  calls  a  tierce  minor,  and  it  is  admitted  to  be 
good,  he  can  reckon  two  tierce  minors,  but  he 
cannot  reckon  the  quart. 

There  is  one  exception  to  this.  If  the  elder 
hand  calls  a  sequence  that  is  good  against  the 
cards  {i.e.,  better  than  any  sequence  the  younger 
hand  could  possibly  have  in  hand  and  discard 
taken  together),  he  can  reckon  any  sequence  he 
holds,  even  though  it  is  better  than  the  one  first 
called.  For  example : — A  has  a  quart  to  a  king, 
and  a  tierce  to  a  queen,  good  against  the  cards. 
If  he  first  calls  a  tierce  to  a  queen,  he  may  after- 
wards reckon  his  quart. 

Some  players  show  all  that  they  claim  as  good 
or  equal ;  this,  however,  is  not  compulsory,  unless 
the  cards  are  asked  for. 

As  the  law  now  stands,  calling  is  equivalent  to 
showing.  Hence,  if  A  calls,  say,  "  Forty-eight  in 
diamonds,"  the  only  diamonds  he  can  hold  being 


PIQUET.  9 1 

ace,  knave,  ten,  nine,  eight,  B  is  deemed  to  know 
that  A  holds  a  quart.  A  forgets  to  reckon  his 
quart,  and  leads  a  card.  B  cannot  reckon  any 
equal  or  inferior  sequence.  If  A  remembers  he 
has  not  reckoned  the  quart,  he  can  rectify  the 
omission  before  B  has  played  to  the  first  trick. 
{See  Law  56,  p.  11,  and  Case  IV.,  p.  22.) 

The  younger  hand  is  not  bound  to  call  his  best 
sequence  first.  Thus,  if  the  elder  has  called  a 
tierce  major,  and  the  younger  has  replied,  "  Not 
good,"  the  younger  is  at  liberty  to  show  and  count 
a  tierce  minor  first,  and  then  a  quart  or  larger  se- 
quence. The  reason  for  the  difference  between 
the  elder  and  younger  hands  in  this  respect  is 
that  the  younger  is  only  reckoning  (adding  up 
his  score) ;  but  the  elder  is  ascertaining  whether 
what  he  calls  is  good,  and,  by  calling  a  lower 
sequence  before  a  higher,  he  might  gain  infor- 
mation as  to  the  contents  of  his  opponent's  hand 
to  which  he  is  not  entitled.  The  elder  hand, 
however,  having  called  a  sequence  which  is  good, 
may  reckon  lower  sequences  in  any  order  for  the 
same  reason,  viz.,  that  he  is  then  only  adding  up 
his  score. 

After  sequence  (but  see  p.  87),  quatorzes  {i.e., 
four  aces,  kings,  queens,  knaves,  or  tens),  or  trios 
(three  of  any  of  these),  are  called  and  reckoned 
as  before,  except  that  in  this  combination  there 
can  be  no  equality.  Quatorzes  or  trios  of  cards 
smaller  than  tens  are  of  no  value.  A  quatorze 
if  good  reckons  fourteen  (one  for  each  card  with 


92  PIQUET. 

ten  added) ;  a  trio  if  good  counts  three.  Any 
quatorze  is  good  against  a  trio  ;  thus,  four  tens 
are  good  against  three  aces.  If  each  player  has 
a  quatorze  the  highest  is  good ;  the  same  if  each 
has  a  trio  ;  and,  as  in  the  case  of  sequences,  any- 
thing that  is  good  enables  the  player  to  count  all 
smaller  combinations  of  four  or  three  in  his  hand, 
and  nullifies  any  that  the  adversary  may  hold  of 
intermediate  value.  For  example : — A  has  four 
tens  and  three  knaves ;  B,  three  aces.  A  scores 
fourteen  for  tens,  and  three  for  knaves ;  and  B 
does  not  count  his  aces. 

A  quatorze  or  trio  is  called  thus: — "Four  aces," 
"Three  queens,"  or  as  the  case  may  be.  The 
younger  hand  then  says,  "  Good,"  or  "  Not  good," 
as  before.  The  cards  of  a  quatorze  or  trio  are 
never  shown  on  the  table.  The  adversary,  how- 
ever, has  a  right  to  demand  their  production  if 
he  thinks  fit. 

The  reason  that  quatorzes  are  not  shown  is 
that  when  aces,  kings,  queens,  knaves,  or  tens 
are  called,  the  adversary  knows  what  the  cards 
are.  When  a  player  might  hold  a  quatorze,  but 
only  calls  three  of  that  rank  (as,  e.g.,  A  calls  three 
kings,  when  he  might  have  held  four),  the  adver- 
sary is  entitled  tb  know  which  card  is  not  reckoned. 
In  the  case  of  the  example  given,  B  might  say, 
"  Show  your  kings,"  by  which  means  he  would 
ascertain  the  king  that  is  not  called.  But  the 
usual  course  is  for  B  to  say,  "Which  king  do 
you  not  reckon  ? ",  and  A  is  bound  to  reply. 


PIQUET.  93 

In  calling  quatorzes  or  trios  the  elder  hand 
should  call  his  best  first,  as,  if  he  calls  a  lower 
one,  he  cannot  afterwards  reckon  a  higher  one, 
unless  the  lower  one  is  good  against  the  cards. 
If  the  one  first  called  is  good,  any  lower  ones 
may  be  reckoned  without  regard  to  order,  as  in 
the  case  of  sequences. 

The  younger  hand  may  reckon  his  quatorzes 
or  trios,  if  good,  in  any  order.  He  is  not  obliged 
first  to  call  his  best,  and  he  may  rectify  a  miscall 
of  any  kind  until  he  has  played  to  the  first  trick, 
for  the  reason  already  given  {see  p.  91). 

After  the  elder  hand  has  finished  calling,  and 
has  reckoned  all  that  he  has  good,  he  leads  a 
card.  Before  playing  to  this  card,  the  younger 
hand  reckons  all  that  he  has  good,  or  calls  all 
that  he  has  equal. 

A  player  is  not  bound  to  call  anything  unless 
he  pleases ;  and  he  may  always  call  less  than  he 
holds,  if  he  does  not  desire  to  expose  his  hand. 
{See  also  Laws  46-56,  pp.  8-1 1.) 

PLAYING. 

The  players  having  called  what  they  have  good 
or  equal,  and  reckoned  what  they  have  good, 
next  proceed  to  play  the  hands.  The  elder  hand 
leads  any  card  he  pleases,  and  his  opponent  plays 
to  it.  The  younger  hand  must  follow  suit  if 
able,  but  otherwise  he  may  play  any  card  he 
thinks  fit. 


94  PIQUET. 

Two  cards,  one  played  by  each  player,  consti- 
tute a  trick.  The  trick  is  won  by  the  player 
who  plays  to  it  the  higher  card  of  the  suit  led. 
A  player  is  not  obliged  to  win  the  card  led  unless 
he  chooses,  if  he  can  follow  suit  without.  The 
winner  of  the  trick  leads  to  the  next,  and  so 
on,  until  all  the  twelve  cards  in  each  hand  are 
played  out. 

During  the  play  the  leader  counts  one  for  each 
card  led.  He  counts  one  whether  he  wins  the 
trick  or  not.  If  the  leader  wins  the  trick,  his 
adversary  counts  nothing  in  play;  but  if  the 
second  player  wins  the  trick,  he  also  counts  one. 
The  winner  of  the  trick  again  counts  one  for  the 
card  he  next  leads,  and  so  on. 

The  winner  of  the  last  trick  counts  two  instead 
of  one. 

The  tricks  are  left  face  upwards  on  the  table 
in  front  of  the  player  who  wins  them.  They 
may  be  examined  by  either  player  at  any  time. 

If  each  player  wins  six  tricks,  the  cards  are 
divided^  and  there  is  no  further  score.  If  one 
player  wins  more  than  six  tricks  (called  winning 
the  cards).,  he  adds  ten  to  his  score,  beyond  w'hat 
he  has  counted  in  hand  and  play.  If  one  player 
wins  every  trick  (called  winning  a  capoi),  he  adds 
forty  to  his  score  instead  of  ten,  ten  for  the  cards, 
and  thirty  for  the  capot. 

All  cards  scored  for  as  good,  or  called  as  equal, 
must  be  exhibited  to  the  adversary  if  demanded 
during  the  play  of  the  hand.     This,  however,  does 


PIQUET.  95 

not  apply  to  a  call  of  an  equal  number  of  cards 
for  point  by  the  younger  hand,  when  the  strength 
of  his  point  is  inferior  to  that  of  the  elder's. 
Among  players,  the  cards  are  not  as  a  rule  ex- 
hibited ;  but  all  necessary  questions  with  regard 
to  them  are  replied  to.  Thus,  A  scores  a  point 
of  five  cards,  and  plays  three  of  them.  Presently, 
B  wants  to  refresh  his  memory,  so  he  says,  "  How 
many  of  your  point  have  you  ?  ",  or  "  How  many 
spades?",  or  as  the  case  may  be;  and  A  is  bound 
to  reply,  "Two."  Similarly,  if  A  had  scored  three 
kings,  B  is  entitled  to  a  reply  to  the  question, 
"  What  kings  have  you  in  hand  ? ",  or  B  might 
ask,  "  Have  you  anything  in  hand  that  you  have 
called  ? ",  when  A  must  tell  him.  {See  also 
Laws  57-60,  pp.  II,  12.) 

CARTE    BLANCHE,    PIQUE    AND    REPIQUE. 

In  the  foregoing  pages  carte  blanche,  pique  and 
repique  have  been  omitted  in  order  to  simplify  the 
description  of  the  game. 

If  either  player  has  dealt  to  him  a  hand  which 
contains  neither  king,  queen,  nor  knave,  he  holds 
carte  blanche.  This  entitles  him  to  score  ten.  Be- 
fore he  takes  in  he  must  show  the  carte  blanche 
by  dealing  his  cards  quickly  one  on  top  of  the 
other,  face  upwards  on  the  table,  after  which  he 
retakes  them  into  his  hand.  If  either  player  has 
carte  blanche,  he  must  inform  his  adversary  at 
once,   by  saying,    "  I    have   a   carte   blanche,"  or 


96  PIQUET. 

"Discard  for  carte  Ijlanchc."  As  soon  as  the 
adversary  has  discarded,  the  carte  blanche  is 
shown  him.     (See  also   Laws   18-20,  pp.  3,  4.) 

If  the  elder  hand  scores,  /«  /iand  and plaj,  thirty 
or  more  before  his  adversary  counts  anything  that 
hand,  he  wins  ?i.  pique.  A  pique  entitles  the  player 
to  add  thirty  to  his  score ;  but  in  all  other  respects 
the  hand  is  played  as  already  explained.  For  ex- 
ample : — A  has  a  quint  major,  which  is  good  for  point 
and  sequence,  and  three  aces,  which  are  also  good. 
He  counts  twenty  for  the  point  and  quint,  and  three 
for  the  aces,  and  then  leads  the  quint  major  and  the 
two  aces,  or  one  of  the  aces  and  some  other  card. 
This  makes  him  thirty  ;  and,  as  his  adversary  has  not 
scored  anything,  it  is  a  pique.  A,  when  he  leads 
the  card  which  makes  him  thirty,  instead  of  counting 
"Thirty,"  counts  "Sixty."  It  is  not  necessary  that 
the  card  led  which  makes  thirty  should  win  the  trick. 
The  elder  hand,  having  reckoned  tw^enty-nine  when 
his  adversary  has  reckoned  nothing,  and  having  the 
lead,  wins  a  pique  even  if  he  leads  a  losing  card. 

If  a  player  scores,  in  hand  alo?te,  thirty  points  or 
more  by  scores  that  reckon  in  order  before  anything 
that  his  adversary  can  count,  he  wins  a  repique.  A 
repique  entitles  the  player  to  add  sixty  to  his  score. 
Thus : — If  a  player  has  point,  quint,  and  quatorze  (all 
good),  he  repiques  his  adversary.  He  counts  five 
for  point,  fifteen  for  sequence,  making  twenty,  and 
fourteen  for  quatorze,  making  thirty-four.      Instead 


PIQUET.  97 

of  counting  "Thirty-four,"  he  counts  "Ninety-four." 
In  all  other  ways,  the  hand  is  played  as  already 
explained. 

Equalities  do  not  save  a  pique  or  a  repique. 
In  the  case  of  an  equality,  the  game  proceeds  as 
though  no  such  mode  of  scoring  existed.  Thus : — 
A  has  point  equal,  quint  and  quatorze,  both  good, 
and  leads  a  card.      He  wins  a  pique. 

SCORING. 

During  the  progress  of  the  hand,  each  player 
continues  to  repeat  aloud  the  amount  of  his 
score  that  hand  for  the  time  being  {see  Example, 
pp.  103-5).  ^^  the  end  of  the  hand,  the  number 
scored  is  written  on  a  scoring  card,  each  player 
recording  both  his  own  and  his  opponent's  score, 
in  separate  columns. 

Although  the  scores  are,  for  the  sake  of  con- 
venience, recorded  only  at  the  end  of  the  hand, 
they  are  recordable  when  they  accrue,  whether 
made  by  the  elder  or  younger  hand,  in  the  order 
given  in  the  following  table  of  precedence : — 


I. 

Carte  blanche. 

2. 

Point. 

3- 

4- 

Sequences. 
Quatorzes  and  trios. 

5- 
6. 

Points  made  in  play. 
The  cards. 

98  PIQUET. 

It  is  important  to  bear  in  mind  this  order  of 
accretion  in  the  case  of  piques  or  repiques. 
Thus,  a  pique  can  only  be  won  by  the  elder 
hand,  as  the  card  he  leads  counts  one  /«  play 
before  the  younger  hand  plays ;  hence  it  stops  a 
pique.  But  the  one  reckoned  by  the  elder  hand, 
when  he  leads  his  first  card,  does  not  prevent 
his  being  repiqued  if  he  has  nothing  good,  and 
the  younger  hand  can  score  thirty  or  more 
in  hand,  because  scores  in  hand  reckon  before 
points  made  in  play.  So,  also,  if  the  elder 
hand  scores  thirty  or  more  in  hand,  he  does 
not  necessarily  gain  a  repique.  Thus  he  may 
have  a  quint  (good),  a  tierce,  and  a  quatorze 
(good).  But  if  his  point  is  not  good,  he  does 
not  gain  a  repique,  although  he  scores  thirty-two 
in  hand  alone ;  because  the  younger  hand's  point 
is  recordable  in  order  before  the  sequences  and 
quatorze. 

To  take  another  example :  A  (elder  hand)  has 
a  huitieme  (good  for  twenty- six)  and  a  tierce 
(good  for  three  more).  He  then  leads  a  card, 
and  thus  reaches  thirty.  B  (younger  hand)  has 
three  tens  which  are  good.  The  three  tens 
save  a  pique,  as  they  reckon  in  order  before  the 
point  made  in  play  by  A. 

Carte  blanche,  taking  precedence  of  all  other 
scores,  saves  piques  and  repiques.  Carte  blanche 
counts  towards  piques  and  repiques  just  the  same 
as  other  scores.  Thus:  —  A  player  showing  a 
carte  blanche,  and,  after  discarding,  having  point 


PIQUET.  99 

and    quint    (both    good),    would    repique    his    ad- 
versary. 

A  capot  does  not  count  towards  a  pique,  as  the 
forty  for  the  capot  is  added  after  the  play  of  the 
hand  is  over.  For  instance  : — A  (elder  hand)  has 
ace,  king,  queen,  knave,  eight  of  spades ;  ace, 
king,  knave,  ten,  eight,  seven  of  hearts ;  and  ace 
of  diamonds.  His  point  and  quart  are  good. 
These,  with  three  aces,  reckon  thirteen.  He 
wins  every  trick,  and  his  total  score  is  twenty-six. 
He  adds  forty  for  the  capot,  making  him  sixty-six. 
He  does  not  gain  a  pique,  as  he  only  made 
twenty-six  in  hand  and  play. 

A  player  who  reckons  nothing  that  deal  as  a 
penalty  (see  Laws  25,  27,  28,  29,  31,  33,  35,  54, 
and  58)  is  not  piqued  or  repiqued  if  he  holds  any 
cards  which,  but  for  the  penalty,  would  have 
scored  before  his  adversary  reached  thirty.  His 
cards  though  not  good  to  score,  are  good  to  bar  his 
adversary. 

A  partie  consists  of  six  deals,  each  player 
dealing  three  times.  The  partie  is  won  by  the 
player  who  makes  the  higher  score  in  six  deals. 
If  both  players  score  the  same  number,  each 
deals  once  more.  If  there  is  a  second  tie,  the 
partie  is  drawn. 

By  agreement  the  partie  may  consist  of  only 
four  deals,  the  scores  in  the  first  and  last  deals 
counting  double.  In  case  of  a  tie,  each  deals 
once  more,  the  scores  in  the  extra  deals  counting 
single. 

H  2 


lOO  PIQUET. 

The  winner  of  a  partie  deducts  the  points  scored 
by  his  opponent  from  his  own,  and  adds  a  hundred 
to  the  difference.  Thus  : — A  scores  in  the  six  deals 
1 3 1 ;  B  scores  113.  A  wins  1 3 1  -  1 3  =  1 1 8  points. 
Should  the  loser  score  less  than  a  hundred  in  the 
six  deals,  the  winner  (whether  he  has  made  a 
hundred  or  not),  adds  the  points  scored  by  his 
adversary  to  his  own,  instead  of  deducting  them, 
and  also  adds  a  hundred  to  his  score.  Thus  : — 
A  scores  125;  B  scores  81.  A  wins  125 +  181 
=  306.  This  is  called  winning  a  rubicon.  {See 
also  Laws  61-74,  pp.  12-14.) 

When,  during  the  last  hand  of  a  partie,  a  player 
finds  (before  the  play  of  the  hand  begins)  that  he 
cannot  save  his  rubicon,  he  is  not  required  to 
count  any  points  in  play.  He  throws  down  his 
hand,  and  tells  his  adversary  to  count  every  trick 
(thirteen),  and  the  cards  (ten).  He  may,  if  he 
pleases,  play  to  divide  the  cards ;  but  in  that  case, 
he  has  to  add  to  his  score  the  points  he  makes  in 
play.  Or,  his  adversary  may  play  for  a  capot ;  but 
that  does  not  affect  the  case,  as,  if  capoted,  the 
loser  has  no  points  in  play  to  score. 

Scoring  cards  and  pencils  are  required.  The 
diagram  (p.  10 1)  shows  a  card  ruled  for  six  parties, 
or  for  five  parties  if  the  totals  are  recorded  on  the 
same  card. 

The  game  is  played  for  so  much  a  point,  or  for  so 
much  a  hundred,  odd  money  not  being  reckoned 
in  the  final  total.  Thus  :  —  A  and  B  play  five 
parties,  at  ten  shillings  a  hundred  (about  equal  to 


PIQUET.  lOI 

half-crown  points  at  whist).  A  wins  75  points,  as 
shown  by  the  card.  Fractions  of  fifty  points  are 
not  reckoned  ;  A  wins  five  shiUings.  Some  players 
only  neglect  fractions  of  twenty-five  points ;  this 
should  be  agreed  beforehand.  Twopenny  points 
are  reckoned  at  a  pound  a  hundred,  fractions  of 


A 

B 

A 

2J 

A   1   i? 

A 

B 

A 

B 

A 

B 

27 

13 

15 

30 

20 

IS 

2S 

14 

23 

12 

Tot 

ah. 

15 

31 

75 

4 

4 

115 

11 

36 

9 

25 

150 

476 

M 

6 

45 

G 

10 

42 

22 

12 

40 

S 

416 

141 

18 

29 

32 

12 

33 

11 

8 

41 

15 

26 

126 

35 

12 

G 

3S 

3 

74 

19 

17 

27 

13 

692 
617 

G17 

25 

23 

51 

^ 

5 

41 

15 

24 

IG 

20 

16  J: 

14 

114 

224 
192 

92 

75 

301 

103 

144 

130 

104 

75 

175 

3 

4 

150 

41G 

\47G 

141 

12G 

fifty  points  not  counting  in  the  final  total.  Three- 
penny points  are  not  reckoned  by  the  hundred, 
but  by  multiples  of  forty,  fractions  of  forty  points 
not  counting;  hence  75  points  only  score  as  40. 
At  sixpenny  or  shilling  points,  fractions  of  a  pound 
are  excluded  in  reckoning  the  finals;  75  points, 
therefore,  only  score  as  60. 


PIQUET. 


At  chouette  piquet  {see  p.  io6),  the  points  of  each 
partie  are  reckoned  as  multiples  of  ten,  adding  one 
to  the  tens  for  units  above  five,  and  neglecting 
units  from  one  to  five.  Thus,  416  counts  420  ; 
141  counts  140.  As  the  score  must  always  end  in 
a  naught,  the  naughts  are  omitted  when  entering 
the  figures.  Taking,  as  an  example,  the  parties  on 
the  scoring  card,  p.  loi,  the  totals  might  be  entered 
as  under  : — 


First  Partie. 

Second  Partie. 

Third  Partie. 

etc. 

A  +  30 
B-  15 
C  -  15 

A  +  84 
B  -  42 
C  -  42 

A  -  96 
B  +  48 

C  +  48 

Instead  of  writing  each  score  at  length,  as  above, 
and  taking  out  the  results  at  the  end,  it  is  found 
convenient  in  practice  to  add  and  subtract  the 
totals  after  every  partie,  and  to  keep  a  separate 
scoring  card  for  that  purpose,  as  shown  below :— 


A 

+ 

30  + 

114 

+ 

18 

+ 

32 

+ 

19 

B 

- 

15  - 

57 

- 

9 

- 

37 

- 

50 

C 

- 

15  - 

57 

- 

9 

+ 

5 

+ 

31 

A  wins  190;  C,  310;  B  loses  500.  At  ten 
shillings  a  hundred,  when  fractions  of  fifty  points 
are  not  reckoned,  A  wins  150  (or  fifteen  shillings); 
C  wins  300  (or  thirty  shillings).  B,  on  the  score, 
actually  loses  500  (or  fifty  shillings);  but  in  con- 
sequence of  fractional  parts  of  fifty  points  not 
counting  in  the  final  total  of  amounts  receivable, 
B  gets  off  with  a  loss  of  forty-five. 


PIQUET.  103 


EXAMPLE. 


The  following  Example  will  show  more  dis- 
tinctly than  mere  description  the  mode  of  playing 
the  game.  The  reader,  if  previously  unacquainted 
with  Piquet,  is  advised,  after  reading  the  Descrip- 
tion of  the  Game  (pp.  83-101),  to  play  over  the 
Example,  and  then  to  re-peruse  the  description. 
When  playing  the  Example,  it  is  advisable,  in 
the  case  of  learners,  to  place  the  cards  face 
upwards  on  the  table. 

A  and  B  are  the  players. 

A  (elder  hand)  has  dealt  him  ace,  king,  knave 
of  spades ;  ace,  queen,  knave,  eight  of  hearts ; 
knave,  eight,  seven  of  clubs ;  and  nine,  eight  of 
diamonds. 

He  discards  king  of  spades ;  eight,  seven  of 
clubs ;    and  nine,  eight  of  diamonds. 

He  takes  in  nine,  eight  of  spades ;  king  of 
hearts ;    nine  of  clubs  ;    and  king  of  diamonds. 

B  (younger  hand)  has  ten,  seven  of  spades ; 
ten,  nine,  seven  of  hearts ;  king,  queen,  ten  of 
clubs  ;    and   ace,   queen,  knave,  ten  of  diamonds. 

He  discards  seven  of  spades ;  and  nine,  seven 
of  hearts. 

He  takes  in  queen  of  spades ;  ace  of  clubs ; 
and  seven  of  diamonds. 


I  ©4  PIQUET. 

The  game  then  proceeds  thus: — 

A  (calls  his  point),  "Five  cards." 

B  (says),  "What  do  they  make?" 

A  (replies),  "Forty-nine,"  or  "Making  nine." 

13  (replies),  "  Good  " 

A  (says),  "In  hearts;  and  quart  major." 

B,  "Good." 

A  (counting  his  point  and  sequence),  "  Five  and 
four  are  nine."     "  Three  knaves  ?  " 

B,  "Not  good." 

A  (leads  ace  of  hearts,  and  says),  "Ten." 

B  (says),  "  Four  tens  fourteen,  and  three  queens 
seventeen."     (Plays  the  ten  of  hearts,  j 

A  (leads  all  the  hearts,  and  says),  "  Eleven, 
twelve,  thirteen,  fourteen." 

B  (plays  seven,  ten,  knave,  and  queen  of  dia- 
monds, and,  repeating  his  score,  says),  "Seventeen." 

A  now  has  five  tricks,  and,  in  order  to  win  the 
cards,  he  should  lead  anything  but  a  spade ;  for  B, 
having  called  queens  and  tens,  must  have  queen, 
ten  of  spades. 

A  (leads  king  of  diamonds,  and  says),  "Fifteen." 

B  (wins  with  ace  of  diamonds,  and  says), 
"Eighteen." 

B  (leads,  ace,  king,  queen,  and  ten  of  clubs, 
and  says),  "  Nineteen,  twenty,  twenty-one,  twenty- 
two." 

A  (plays  nine,  knave  of  clubs,  and  eight,  nine,  of 
spades,  and,  repeating  his  score,  says),  "Fifteen." 

B  (leads  queen  of  spades,  and  says),  "  Twenty- 
three." 


PIQUET.  105 

A  (wins  with  ace,  and  says),  "Sixteen,"  (and 
then  leads  knave  of  spades,  and  says),  "Eighteen," 
(and  then  adding  the  score  for  the  cards,  says), 
"Twenty-eight." 

B  (repeating  his  score,  says),  "Twenty-three." 
A  then  writes  on  his  scoring  card,   28,   23  ;   B 
writes  on  his  card,  23,  28  ;  the  cards  are  gathered 
up  by  B,  and  the  other  pack  is  cut  for  A's  deal. 


lo6  PIQUET. 


CHOUETTE  PIQUET. 


Sometimes  Piquet  is  played  by  three  persons. 
The  three  players  (A,  B,  C,)  cut.  The  one  who 
cuts  the  highest  card  (A)  has  choice  of  deal  and 
cards,  and  plays  one  partie,  d  la  chouetie,  against 
the  other  two  in  consultation.  The  player  who 
cuts  the  lowest  card  (C)  sits  out,  and  advises  B. 

If  the  single  player  (A)  wins  the  partie,  he  con- 
tinues to  play  against  the  other  two.  C  takes  B's 
place,  and  B  advises  C  ;  and  so  on. 

As  soon  as  A  loses  a  partie,  the  player  who 
advised  in  that  partie  (say  C)  takes  A's  place.  B 
plays  against  the  other  two,  and  A  advises  C.  If 
C  loses,  A  takes  C's  place,  and  C  advises  A ;  if 
C  wins,  A  takes  B's  place,  and  B  advises  A;  and 
so  on. 

The  single  player  has  choice  of  deal  and  cards 
throughout,  and  plays  double  stakes,  as  at  dummy. 

When  a  chouetie  is  played,  the  totals  of  each 
partie  are  recorded  on  a  separate  scoring  card, 
as  shown  at  p.  102. 


PIQUET.  107 


CONDUCT  OF  THE  GAME. 


SHUFFLING. 

The  pack  should  be  thoroughly  shuffled  after 
every  hand.  Owing  to  the  nature  of  the  game, 
cards  of  the  same  suit  are  often  played  together. 
Thus  : — A  has  a  sixieme  major  in  spades ;  B,  a 
sixieme  minor  in  hearts.  A  puts  down  his  sixieme, 
and  says,  "Play  six  cards."  B  has  no  spade,  and 
plays  his  sixieme  minor.  A  then,  seeing  he  cannot 
win  another  trick,  lays  down  the  remainder  of  his 
sorted  hand  ;  on  these  cards  B  places  the  remainder 
of  his  sorted  hand.  Each  scores  seven  in  play. 
If  the  cards  are  now  taken  up  together  and  are 
not  well  shuffled,  the  consequence  will  be  that, 
when  this  pack  is  dealt  again,  the  sixifemes  will  be 
pretty  equally  divided  between  the  players,  and  the 
cards  in  the  stock  will  run  in  suits ;  or  if  the  pack 
is  so  cut  that  one  of  the  sixiemes  is  at  or  near  the 
bottom,  those  cards  will  form  the  major  part  of  the 
stock.  Even  if  the  cards  are  moderately  shuffled, 
the  cards  will  have  a  tendency  to  keep  together  in 
suits,  as  any  one  may  convince  himself  by  giving 
an  ordinary  shuffle  to  a  sorted  pack,  and  then 
turning  it  face  upwards. 


Io8  PIQUET. 

DEALING. 

The  player  who  cuts  the  higher  card  should 
elect  to  deal.  There  is  a  slight  advantage  in 
having  the  first  deal.  The  player  who  deals  first 
is  elder  hand  in  the  last  deal  of  the  partie,  and  is 
therefore  the  attacking  hand  when  he  has  the  best 
opportunity  of  discarding,  or  of  playing,  to  the 
score. 

MANAGEMENT    OF    THE    STOCK. 

After  dealing,  count  the  cards  in  the  stock  (and 
see  Laws  lo,  ii,  12,  39,  40,  41,  42,  and  43).  Place 
the  stock  face  downwards  on  the  table,  in  one 
packet  (Law  9).  Some  dealers  separate  the  stock 
into  packets  of  three  and  five.  The  elder  hand 
should  always  object  to  this,  as,  if  he  takes  up  a 
card  he  is  not  entitled  to  see  (which  he  might 
readily  do  if  the  packets  happen  to  be  separated 
wrongly),  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

TAKING    UP    THE    HAND. 

On  taking  up  your  hand,  count  that  it  contains 
the  right  number  of  cards ;  if  not,  announce  the 
fact  (and  see  Laws  11,  38,  39).  While  counting 
and  sorting  your  cards,  look  for  carte  blanche. 

Your  next  step  is  to  decide  on  your  discard. 
[See  Discarding,  pp.  1 16-15  i.) 

TAKING    IN. 

Having    discarded,    you    proceed    to    take  in. 

When  taking  in,  always  count  that  you  leave  the 

full  number   of  cards   for   the   younger   hand,  the 


PIQUET.  log 

penalty  for  mixing  one  of  his  cards  with  your 
hand  being  that  you  can  reckon  nothing  that 
deal ;  and  this  even  if  there  is  an  erroneous  deal, 
and  there  are  not  the  right  number  of  cards  in 
the  stock.  The  best  method  is  to  draw  the  stock 
towards  you,  at  the  same  time  spreading  it  slightly, 
when  you  can  easily  count  the  stock  before  taking 
up  a  card. 

The  younger  hand,  before  taking  in,  should  also 
count  that  the  proper  number  of  cards  are  left  in 
the  stock ;  if  too  many  are  left,  and  the  younger 
hand  mixes  one  of  his  opponent's  cards  with  his 
hand,  he  can  reckon  nothing  that  deal. 

CALLING    AND    SHOWING. 

Before  calling  your  hand,  you  should  ascertain 
what  remains  good  against  you,  or  what  there  is 
equal.  {See  also  p.  152.)  If  necessary,  examine 
your  discard  for  this  purpose. 

When  a  point  or  sequence  is  called,  which  is 
good  or  equal,  it  is  a  safe  plan,  especially  for 
novices,  to  show  it ;  because  a  player  who  volun- 
tarily shows  anything,  which  he  claims  to  be  good 
or  equal,  is  liable  to  no  penalty  for  miscalling 
(Law  55). 

If  you  are  not  in  the  habit  of  showing  what  you 
call,  and  have  put  out  a  card  of  your  point,  which 
is  nevertheless  allowed  to  be  good  or  equal,  and 
the  absent  card  may  make  a  difference  to  your 
adversary  in  playing  t"he  cards,  you  should  inform 
him  of  the  value  of  the  card  you  do  not  call.      For 


no  PIQUET. 

example  : — You  are  younger  hand,  and  have  dis- 
carded the  king  of  spades.  You  have  taken  in 
spades,  and  your  point,  which  is  good,  is  ace, 
knave,  ten,  eight  of  spades.  When  calUng  the 
point,  you  should  say,  "  Thirty-nine  in  spades,  and 
I  do  not  reckon  the  king."  Your  adversary  will 
then  know,  as  he  is  entitled  to  know,  and  as  he 
could  know  if  he  asked  to  see  your  point,  that  he 
need  only  keep  one  guard  to  his  queen  when 
playing  the  cards. 

You  would  be  equally  entitled  not  to  reckon  the 
king,  if  you  had  it  in  hand,  and  wished  to  conceal 
your  strength,  in  hopes  of  persuading  your  oppo- 
nent to  unguard  his  queen  when  playing  the  cards. 
But  as  calling  without  showing  draws  special  at- 
tention to  the  absence  of  the  king,  it  seems 
preferable  always  to  show  your  point,  and  to  say 
nothing  about  what  you  do  not  reckon.  In  the 
case  supposed,  put  ace,  knave,  ten,  eight  of  spades 
on  the  table,  and  say,  "Good  for  four,"  and  let  your 
adversary  think  what  he  pleases  about  the  king. 

As  a  matter  of  etiquette,  if,  under  such  circum- 
stances, you  do  not  show  your  point,  and  do  not 
announce  that  the  king  is  out,  your  adversary 
would  have  just  cause  of  complaint  at  not  being 
informed.  If  he  is  misled  by  your  ignorance  of 
this  point  of  etiquette,  the  only  reparation  you  can 
make  is  to  offer  to  play  the  cards  again. 

If  you  have,  or  might  have,  two  points  of  the 
same  counting  value,  it  is  also  your  duty  to  de- 
clare which  of  them  you  claim  as  good  or  equal. 


PIQUET.  Ill 

Thus  : — You  have  king,  queen,  ten,  eight  of  one 
suit,  and  might  have  ace,  queen,  ten,  seven  of 
another.  If  thirty-eight  is  good  or  equal,  you 
should  say,  "  In  spades,"  or  "  In  hearts,"  or  as 
the  case  may  be,  without  waiting  to  be  asked 
in  which  suit  your  point  is.  If  younger  hand, 
you  need  not  announce  the  suit  until  the  elder 
has  led  a  card. 

Similar  observations  apply  to  sequences  and 
trios  {see  Case  XII.,  pp.  27,  28). 

If  you  call  a  trio,  allowed  to  be  good,  when 
you  might  hold  a  quatorze  of  the  same  rank,  as 
three  kings  when  you  might  hold  four,  you 
should  state  which  king  you  do  not  reckon, 
e.g.,  "Three  kings,  not  reckoning  the  king  of 
diamonds."  Many  players  omit  to  say  which 
card  of  a  quatorze  they  do  not  reckon,  and 
wait  to  be  asked.  In  that  case,  you  should 
enquire  which  card  of  the  quatorze  your  ad- 
versary does  not  reckon ;  but  you  should  not 
j)ut  the  question  until  he  has  played  a  card  {see, 
also,  Case  IV.,  p.  22). 

The  question  should  be   in  this  form,  "  Which 

do  you  not  reckon  ?  "     You  must  not  assume 

that  a  card  is  out  merely  because  it  is  not  called  ; 
and  your  adversary  is  not  bound  to  admit  that  he 
has  not  called  a  card  (whether  by  inadvertence  or 
design)  which  he  holds  in  his  hand. 

If  the  question  is  put  in  another  form,  e.g., 
"  Which  king  have  you  put  out  ? "  and  the  ad- 
versary has   not  put   out   a  king,   but   holds  four, 


112  PIQUET. 

having  called  three,  he  is  entitled  to  reply,  "  I 
do  not  reckon  the  king  of  spades,"  or  of  the 
suit  in  which  he  deems  it  best  to  conceal  the 
king  from  you.  Or,  he  may  simply  answer,  "  King 
of  spades."  In  giving  this  answer,  he  assumes,  as 
he  is  entitled  to  do,  that  you  have  asked  him  the 
regular  question.  He  leaves  it  doubtful  whether 
he  has  a  king  out  or  not ;  and  all  Piquet  players 
understand  his  reply  in  that  sense  {see  Case  XVI., 

P-  3°)- 

Many  players  have  a  habit  of  referring  to  the 
discard  while  the  hand  is  being  called.  It  is 
better  to  avoid  this,  as,  by  your  consulting  the 
discard,  a  shrewd  adversary  may  gain  a  clue  to 
a  card  you  have  rejected,  or  may  be  reminded 
of  a  miscall.  Thus,  he  calls  three  queens,  and 
you,  having  no  queen  in  hand,  immediately  look 
at  your  discard.  If  you  find  a  queen  there,  your 
opponent  will  probably  conclude  that  you  were 
looking  for  the  fourth  queen ;  if  you  do  not  find 
a  queen  there,  and  there  has  been  a  miscall,  your 
adversary  is  reminded  that  he  might  have  four 
queens,  while  he  is  in  time  to  rectify  his  error. 

PLAYING    THE    CARDS. 

During  the  play  of  the  cards,  the  opponent 
is  entitled  to  be  informed  as  to  all  the  cards 
you  have  in  hand,  which  have  been  reckoned 
as  good  or  called  as  equal. 

The  question  is  usually  put  in  this  way,  "  How 
many   of  your  point?"   or,    "How  many  of  your 


PIQUET.  113 

quint?'"'  or  as  the  case  may  be.  Sometimes, 
however,  it  takes  this  form,  "How  many  clubs?" 
or  as  the  case  may  be. 

Suppose  you  hold  three  clubs,  and  have  only 
called  two  of  them.  You  are  entitled  to  reply, 
"Two  that  I  have  called,"  or,  "Two  of  my 
quint,''  or  simply,  "Two."  This  is  understood 
by  all  Piquet  players  as  leaving  it  doubtful 
whether  you  have  a  third  club,  and  not 
necessarily  that  you  have  discarded  one.  The 
information  should  be  only  as  to  cards  called 
for  the  i^urpose  of  scoring,  or  of  preventing 
an  adverse  score.  The  enquirer  is  bound  in 
effect  to  say,  "  How  many  of  so  and  so  have  you 
that  you  have  called?"  {See  Cases  XV.,  XVI., 
pp.    29,   30.) 

It  is  disputed  whether  a  player,  who  has  the 
wrong  number  of  cards  in  hand,  may  cover  his 
mistake  by  intentionally  playing  too  many  or  too 
few  to  his  adversary's  lead.  In  strictness,  the 
cards  should  be  played  one  by  one ;  but,  for 
the  sake  of  convenience  the  leader  frequently 
puts  down  a  number  of  winning  cards  together. 
If,  on  doing'  this,  he  says,  "  Keej)  three  (or  four) 
cards,"  or  as  the  case  may  be,  it  seems  only 
reasonable  that  the  second  to  play  should  be  at 
liberty  to  do  as  he  is  bid,  and  to  keep  the 
number  specified.  He  is  not  bound  to  count 
the  cards  led  by  his  adversary,  witli  whom  the 
initial  irregularity  rests.  But,  if  the  second  to 
play  is  told  to  i)lay  so  many  cards,  the  case  is 
I 


114  PIQUET. 

difierent,  and  he  ought  not  knowingly  to  play 
any  other  number.  He  must  then  submit  to  the 
consequences  of  his  blunder.  Some  players  think 
that  even  in  the  first  instance,  the  wrong  number 
of  cards  should  not  be  played  with  intention. 
This  IS  a  question  of  ethics,  which  can  only  be 
decided  by  the  custom  of  the  card-table.  No 
rule  has  ever  been  laid  down.  It  is  believed, 
after  consultation  with  several  players  of  repute, 
that  the  general  custom  is  as  here  stated.  The 
leader  can  always  protect  himself  by  counting 
the  cards  played. 

Another  undecided  point  in  playing  the  cards, 
which  often  occurs,  is  this: — At  the  end  of  a 
hand  the  leader  says,  "All  the  others  are  yours." 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  they  are  not  yours,  you 
having  discarded  a  winning  card.  What  is  your 
proper  course  ? 

In  the  opinion  of  players  well  qualified  to 
judge,  you  should  make  no  reply  to  such  an 
observation.  If  your  adversary  then  proceeds  to 
play  his  cards,  you  must  play  to  them  in  the 
usual  way,  and  let  him  win  such  tricks  as  he 
can.  If  he  throws  down  his  hand,  and  you  have 
discarded  a  winning  card,  and  therefore  cannot 
win  the  remaining  tricks,  you  should  request  him 
to  play  the  cards  one  by  one.  Such  a  request  is, 
no  doubt,  equivalent  to  informing  your  adversary 
that  you  have  a  winning  card  out,  and  the  con- 
sequence may  be  somewhat  disastrous  to  you. 
This  is  a  misfortune  which  cannot  be  helped. 


PIQUET.  115 

SCORING. 

During  the  calling  and  the  play  of  the  hand, 
always  keep  in  mind  your  adversary's  score  as 
well  as  your  own,  as,  even  among  the  most 
honourable  players,  mistakes  sometimes  occur. 
If  you  observe  that  your  adversary  is  reckoning 
too  much,  correct  him  at  once. 

After  the  play  of  the  cards,  call-  both  your 
own  and  your  adversary's  scores  aloud  as  you 
record  them;  your  adversary  should  do  the  same, 
or  should  admit  your  call  to  be  correct. 

At  the  end  of  the  partie,  similarly  compare 
the  total  before  entering  it  on  your  scoring  card 
(and  see  Law  74,  p.   14). 


■r^r 


12 


Il6  PIQUET. 


DISCAEDING. 


INTRODUCTORY- 

On  acconnt  of  the  variety  and  complexity  of 
the  considerations  involved  in  discarding  at 
Piquet,  the  few  general  rules  that  can  be  laid 
down  are  liable  to  frequent  modification.  Subject 
to  this  condition,  a  statement  follows  of  the  more 
important  points  to  be  borne  in  mind  when 
discarding. 

This  statement  is  supplemented  by  the  appli- 
cation of  the  Doctrine  of  Probabilities  to  various 
cases,  and  by  a  series  of  illustrative  Examples. 

GENERAL    RULES. 

Before  deciding  on  your  discard,  you  should 
ascertain  whether  you  hold  anything  which  is 
good  against  the  cards,  or  is  equal,  and  what 
there  is  against  you  that  may  be  reckoned  as 
good,  or  called  as  equal. 

For  example  : — You  take  up  A's  hand,  p.  103 
{q.v.).  There  are  against  you,  a  six-card  point, 
a  quint  major,  and  four  tens.  You  have  nothing 
good,  and  may  be  repiqued.  In  addition,  there 
are  two  five-card  points  against  you,  a  quart 
minor,    a    tierce    major,    three    kings    and    three 


PIQUET.  117 

queens.  You  should  make  yourself  aware  of  all 
this  before  throwing  out  a  card ;  and  so  on  for 
other  hands.  At  first,  this  will  be  slow  work ; 
but,  with  practice,  you  will  be  able  to  perform 
the  mental  operation  of  finding  what  there  is 
against  you,  with  but  slight  effort. 

When  discarding,  elder  hand,  your  main  object, 
with  moderately  good  cards,  should  be  to  plan  an 
attack.  You  should  freely  unguard  kings  and 
queens,  and  should  throw  out  whole  suits,  with 
a  view  to  making  a  large  score  if  you  take  in 
to  the  suits  you  keep. 

On  the  contrary,  your  first  care,  younger  hand, 
should  be  to  protect  your  weak  places.  You 
should  keep  guards  to  kings  and  queens ;  and 
you  should  seldom  denude  yourself  entirely  of  a 
suit  of  which  you  hold  one  or  two  small  cards 
only,  as  these  may  guard  high  cards  taken  in. 
The  elder  hand  will  probably  lead  his  best  suit; 
and  that  is  not  unlikely  to  be  the  one  in  which 
you  were  originally  weak.  For  instance  : — Sup- 
pose you,  being  younger  hand,  take  up  the  cards 
already  referred  to  (A's  hand,  p.  103),  including 
nine,  eight  of  diamonds.  You  should  not  part 
with  both  the  diamonds,  but  should  discard  two 
small  clubs  and  one  diamond. 

Keeping  the  best  suit  for  point  is  essential  in 
most  cases,  and  especially  younger  hand.  The 
point  is  of  much  greater  consequence  than  be- 
ginners suppose.  Gaining  the  point  makes  an 
average  difference  of  more  than  ten  to  the  score, 


Il8  PIQUET. 

and,  what  is  more  important,  it  saves  piques  and 
repiques.  It  is,  therefore,  seldom  the  game  for 
either  player  to  discard  from  the  suit  which  he 
selects  for  point. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  point  are  the 
cards.  You  should  discard  in  such  a  way  as  to 
give  the  best  chance  of  dividing  or  winning  the 
cards  Winning  the  cards,  instead  of  losing  them, 
makes  a  difference  of  about  twenty-three  or  twenty- 
four  points. 

In  consequence  of  the  previous  consideration, 
it  not  unfrequently  happens,  more  especially  elder 
hand,  that  you  should  not  keep  the  longest  suit 
for  point,  when  that  suit  is  composed  of  low  cards, 
and  keeping  them  necessitates  the  discard  of  high 
cards  from  other  suits. 

Do  not  break  into  several  suits  in  discarding 
if  it  can  be  avoided.  For  if  cards  are  taken  in  to 
a  broken  suit,  it  remains  ragged.  When  you  have 
made  up  your  mind  to  discard  from  a  given  suit,  it 
is  often  right  to  throw  the  whole  of  it.  If  any  card 
of  that  suit  is  kept,  it  would  be  (a)  because  it  is  a 
winning  card  ;  or,  [b)  because  it  is  a  guarding  card, 
more  especially  younger  hand ;  or,  (c)  because  it 
makes  up  a  quatorze  or  trio. 

Referring  to  the  hand  already  given  (A's  hand, 
p.  103),  you  may  discard  from  three  suits,  for  the 
last  of  the  above  reasons,  throwing  out  two  small 
clubs,  two  diamonds,  and  king  of  spades,  in  order 
to  keep  the  three  knaves.  There  are  four  tens 
against  you ;  and  you  have  a  poor  chance  of  the 


PIQUET.  119 

point  or  of  the  cards,  even  if  you  keep  the  king 
of  spades.  But  suppose  you  had  the  nine  of 
hearts  instead  of  the  knave.  You  should  then 
throw  the  clubs  and  diamonds,  and  keep  two 
unbroken  suits.  Going  for  two  suits  is  often 
the  resource  of  a  player  in  difficulties. 

It  is  sometimes  advisable  to  throw  a  whole  suit, 
younger  hand,  either  because  it  consists  of  three 
useless  cards,  or  because  keeping  it  may  injure 
your  hand  in  other  respects.  In  the  second  case, 
the  rejected  suit  should  be  one  in  which  you  are 
not  likely  to  be  attacked.  Thus :— If  the  suit 
discarded  consists  of  king,  knave,  and  a  small 
one,  the  elder  hand  will  probably  avoid  leading 
that  suit  should  he  happen  to  hold  ace,  queen 
of  it.  King,  queen,  and  a  small  card  is  a  suit 
which  may  be  discarded  without  much  probability 
of  being  attacked  in  it. 

It  is  a  common  error  with  beginners  at  Piquet 
not  to  take  all  their  cards,  especially  if  taking  the 
full  number  involves  parting  with  high  cards.  The 
hands  where  all  the  cards  should  not  be  taken  are 
few.  There  is  not  so  great  an  objection,  however, 
to  the  younger  hand's  leaving  a  card  as  to  the 
elder  hand's  doing  so ;  for,  in  the  latter  case,  the 
card  left  may  be  taken  by  the  adversary,  but, 
in  the  former  case,  it  is  merely  excluded  from 
the  player's  hand.  The  principal  situation  for 
leaving  a  card,  elder  hand,  is  where  there  is  a 
chance  of  a  great  score,  and  no  repique  against 
you. 


ISO  PIQUliT. 

Cards  in  sequence,  or  that  may  form  a  se- 
quence with  those  taken  in,  should  be  kept  in 
preference  to  others  of  equal  value.  Thus : — ■ 
If  you  are  obliged  to  discard  an  ace  or  a  king 
from  an  ace,  king  suit,  discard  the  ace,  as  you 
may  take  in  so  as  to  hold  a  sequence  to  a 
king ;  if  you  discard  the  king  you  cannot  hold 
a  major  sequence  in  that  suit.  But  other  con- 
siderations may  cause  you  to  select  the  king. 
Looking  again  at  A's  hand,  p.  103,  it  will  be 
seen  that  A  throws  the  king  in  preference  to  the 
ace.  His  reason  is  that  he  has  two  aces  and 
only  one  king ;  he  may  take  in  aces  to  form  a 
trio  or  quatorze. 

Again  : — Queen,  knave,  ten  is  a  better  suit  to 
keep  than  king,  knave,  ten,  unless  it  is  deemed 
advisable  to  hold  a  king  rather  than  a  queen.  It 
is  generally  right  to  retain  a  virgin  tierce  to  a 
queen,  especially  younger  hand,  unless  you  see 
a  chance  of  a  great  score  in  other  suits. 

Trios  should  be  kept  if  they  can  be  retained 
without  injuring  the  hand  in  other  respects. 
Thus  : — If  about  to  discard  a  king  or  a  queen 
of  a  suit,  and  you  have  two  other  kings,  discard 
the  queen ;  but  if  you  have  two  other  queens, 
discard  the  king. 

It  is  seldom  advisable  to  put  out  a  high  card 
for  the  sake  of  keeping  a  low  trio,  especially 
when  there  is  a  higher  one  or  a  quatorze  against 
you.  Many  a  hand  is  ruined  by  going  for  qua- 
torzes  of  knaves  or  tens. 


PIQUET.  121 

The  discard  is  further  affected  by  the  state 
of  the  score,  especially  in  the  last  two  hands  of 
the  partie.  If  you  are  a  good  way  ahead,  and 
particularly  in  the  last  hand  but  one,  if  you  have 
a  chance  of  winning  a  rubicon,  you  should  make 
a  safe  discard,  with  the  view  of  dividing  or  winning 
the  cards,  in  order  to  keep  your  adversary  back. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  score  is  much  against 
you,  and  you  are  under  a  rubicon,  you  are  justi- 
fied in  making  a  bold  discard.  In  the  last  hand, 
the  discard  must  frequently  be  regulated  by  the 
state  of  the  score. 

CALCULATIONS. 

The  Piquet  student  should  be  acquainted  with 
the  following  odds. 

The  odds  that  the  elder  hand  (if  he  takes  all 
his  cards)  will  take  in — 


One  named  card  are  .  .  .  3  to  I  against  him 

Two      ,,      cards  are    .  .  .  1 8  to  I 

Three    ,,  ,,  .  .  .        113  to  i 

Four      ,,  ,,  .  .  .  968  to  I 

Five      ,,  ,,  .  .  .    15503  to  I 

One  card  (at  least)  of  two  named  cards  are  5  to  4 


One    ,, 

,,  three 

,,               3  to  2  on  him 

Two  cards      ,, 

,,      ,, 

,,              6  to  I  against  him 

One  card        ,, 

,,  four 

,,              5  to  2  on  him 

Two  cards     ,, 

>>     >> 

,,              3  to  I  against  him 

Three  cards  ,, 

I.     >> 

33  to  1 

122  PIQUET. 

The  odds  that  the  younger  hand  (if  he  takes  all 
his  cards)  will  take  in — 

One  named  card  are          .          .          .  17  to  3  against  him 

Two      ,,       cards  are    .          .          .  62  to  i 

Three    ,,             ,,               ...  1139  to  i 

One  card  (at  least)  of  two  named  cards  are  5  to  2 

One    ,,          ,,         ,,  three              ,,  3  to  2 

Two  cards     ,,         ,,     >,                  ,,  21  to  i 

One  card       ,,          ,,  four               ,,  29  to  28  on  him 

These  calculations  properly  applied  will  direct 
the  player  in  discarding. 

Thus: — It  is  3  to  I  that  the  elder  hand  does  not 
take  in  a  named  card.  It  is,  therefore,  more  advan- 
tageous to  carry  the  best  suit  for  point,  and  high 
cards  for  the  chance  of  the  cards,  than  to  throw 
out  any  of  these  in  hopes  of  taking  in  a  card  to 
complete  a  quatorze  of  queens,  knaves,  or  tens 
{see  Examples  III.,   IV.,  and  V.,  pp.  127-130). 

The  odds  against  taking  in  two  or  more  named 
cards,  or  two  of  three  named  cards,  elder  hand,  are 
so  considerable,  that,  except  in  desperate  cases, 
good  cards  should  not  be  discarded  on  such  a 
speculation.  But  the  odds  are  very  slight  against 
taking  one  at  least  of  two  named  cards,  or  two  at 
least  of  four  named  cards  ;  and  they  are  in  favour 
of  taking  one  at  least  of  three  or  four  named  cards. 

To  apply  these  : — If  the  elder  hand  has  a  quart 
major  and  two  other  aces  dealt  him,  the  odds  that 
he  will  take  in  either  the  ten  to  his  quart,  or  the 
other  ace,  are  only  5  to  4  against  him. 


PIQUET.  123 

Again: — If  the  elder  hand  carries  three  aces  and 
three  kings,  the  odds  against  his  taking  either  the 
other  ace  or  the  other  king  are  only  5  to  4  against  him. 

If  the  elder  hand  has  a  quatorze  dealt  him,  and 
there  is  only  one  superior  quatorze  against  him,  he 
should,  as  a  rule,  keep  the  quatorze,  as  the  odds 
that  he  will  take  in  one  card  at  least  of  four  named 
cards  are  5  to  2  in  his  favour.  But  this  rule  may 
require  reconsideration,  with  a  low  quatorze,  if,  to 
keep  it,  cards  must  be  put  out  that  in  other  ways 
spoil  the  hand,  as,  by  compelling  the  player  to 
discard  from  point  or  sequence,  or  to  put  out  high 
cards  that  risk  the  loss  of  the  cards,  or  of  a  capot. 

With  a  quart  to  a  king  and  two  other  kings,  it  is 
3  to  2  in  favour  of  the  elder  hand  taking  in  the 
ace  or  nine  to  the  quart,  or  the  fourth  king,  and, 
therefore,  it  is  very  advantageous  to  keep  the  quart 
and  the  three  kings. 

If  the  elder  hand  has  a  quart  to  a  king,  and  a 
quart  major  dealt  him,  and  he  is  considerably  be- 
hind in  the  score,  and  he  must  discard  from  one 
of  the  quarts,  he  should  keep  the  quart  to  the 
king ;  for  it  is  3  to  i  against  his  taking  in  the  ten 
to  the  quart  major,  but  only  5  to  4  against  his 
taking  in  either  the  ace  or  nine  to  the  quart  to  the 
king.  (For  a  further  illustration  of  this  calculation, 
see  Example  XXV.,  p.  144.) 

The  chance  of  taking  a  certain  number  of  cards 
included  in  a  larger  number  of  named  cards,  must 
not  be  confused  with  the  chance  of  taking  a  certain 
number  of  named  cards.    For  instance,  if  the  elder 


124  PIQUET. 

hand  has  two  kings  and  two  queens  dealt  him,  the 
odds  arc  3  to  i  against  his  taking  in  two  of  the 
other  kings  and  queens.  But  the  odds  against  his 
taking  two  kings  or  two  queens  under  these  cir- 
cumstances {i.e.,  two  named  cards)  are  17  to  2 
against  him. 

The  odds  against  the  younger  hand's  taking  in 
even  one  named  card  are  so  considerable  (17  to 
3  against  him)  that  he  ought  not  to  discard  on 
such  a  chance  except  in  desperate  cases  {see 
Example  XXX.,  p.  149),  especially  if  by  so 
doing  he  risks  the  winning  or  saving  of  the 
cards  {see  Example  XIII.,  p.  135).  The  same 
rule  applies  a  fortiori  to  more  than  one  card. 

It  is  only  5  to  2  against  the  younger  hand's  taking 
in  one,  at  least,  of  two  named  cards.  Hence,  in 
some  cases,  he  would  discard  on  this  chance  {see 
Example  XVIII.,  p.  139;  and  Example  XXXII., 
p.  150). 

Again  : — It  is  only  3  to  2  against  the  younger 
hand's  taking  in  one,  at  least,  of  three  named 
cards.  Therefore,  if  he  must  take  in  one  of  three 
cards  to  save  a  pique  or  a  repique,  it  would  be 
right  for  him  to  discard  for  this  chance,  even  if,  in 
order  to  do  so,  he  must  put  out  a  valuable  card, 
as  a  king,  or  one  of  his  point.  (For  a  further  illus- 
tration of  this  calculation,  see  Example  XXXI., 
p.  149.) 

It  is  29  to  2S  in  favour  of  the  younger  hand's 
taking  in  one  of  four  named  cards.  So,  having  no 
ace  dealt  him,  he  may  calculate  on  taking  in  at 


PIQUET.  125 

least  one ;  or,  with  two  quarts  (except  major  or 
minor  quarts),  he  may  expect  to  take  a  card  to 
make  a  quint ;  or,  with  a  quart  major  against  him, 
he  may  calculate  on  drawing,  at  least,  one  of  the 
quart  major. 

If  the  elder  hand  has  two  quatorzes  against  him 
(say  of  aces  and  kings),  it  is  only  ^;^  to  31  against 
his  drawing  both  an  ace  and  a  king  [i.e.,  of  drawing 
at  least  one  of  four  aces,  and  at  least  one  of  four 
kings).  Younger  hand,  it  is  4  to  i  against  taking 
in  one  of  each  quatorze. 

The  younger  hand  has  two  trios,  say  three 
knaves  and  three  tens.  Either  of  these,  if  im- 
proved into  a  quatorze,  will  save  the  rubicon. 

To  keep  both  the  trios,  in  good  play,  he  must 
leave  a  card.  Ought  he  to  keep  the  two  trios,  and 
leave  a  card,  or  to  take  three  cards  and  discard 
from  one  of  the  trios  ? 

If  he  takes  all  three  cards,  the  probability  that 
he  draws  the  one  card  to  complete  the  quatorze 

ic    JL—     5_7_ 

If  he  only  takes  two  cards,  the  probability  that 
he  draws  one  at  least  of  the  two  cards  to  com- 
plete a  quatorze  is  ^^^. 

The  odds  are  therefore  74  to  57,  or  about 
4  to  3,  in  favour  of  leaving  a  card. 

EXAMPLES. 

Owing  to  the  impossibility  of  calculating  all 
the  chances  in  many  cases  that  present  them- 
selves in  actual  play,  differences  of  opinion  often 


126 


PIQUET. 


arise  as  to  the  proper  discard.  Such  differences 
of  opinion  may  be  expressed  in  respect  of  some 
of  the  following  hands.  The  Author  will  be 
content  if  he  has  succeeded  in  avoiding  glaring 
errors,  and  in  exhibiting  a  series  of  Examples 
that  serve  to  guide  those  who  desire  to  learn 
the  game  of  Piquet. 

The    score    is   assumed    to    be    love-all,    unless 
otherwise  stated. 


Example  I. 

r/nguarditig  a  king,  elder  hand,  to  keep  the  poitit. 

Guarditig    kings,     and  protecting    a    weak    suit, 

younger  hand. 


With  these  cards  the  elder  hand  should  throw 
out  knave,  eight,  seven  of  spades,  seven  of  hearts, 
and  eight  of  diamonds,  keeping  the  clubs  for  point, 
and  the  three  kings.  In  order  to  keep  the  point 
he  must  unguard  a  king;  and  this,  being  elder 
hand,  he  does  not  hesitate  to  do. 

The  younger  hand  with  these  cards  should 
throw  eight,  seven  of  spades,  and  eight  of  dia- 
monds.    He  should  keep  both  his  kings  guarded. 


PIQUET. 


127 


and  should  on  no  account  part  with  the  seven  of 
hearts,  which  would  be  of  great  service  should  he 
take  in  king  of  hearts,  or  queen  and  another. 


Example  II. 

Keeping  the  pomt.      Utiguarding  suits  elder  ]ia7id, 
and  keeping  guards  you7iger  hajid. 


The  elder  hand  having  these  cards  dealt  him, 
should  keep  the  quart  to  a  king  for  point,  and  the 
four  kings,  discarding  queen,  knave  of  hearts,  ace, 
knave  of  clubs,  and  ten  of  diamonds. 

The  younger  hand  should  also  keep  the  point 
and  the  four  kings.  In  addition  to  this  he  should 
keep  all  his  suits  guarded,  and  should  discard 
knave  of  hearts,  and  ace,  knave  of  clubs.  He 
should  not  part  with  the  ten  of  diamonds. 


Example  III. 
Discarding  from  low  trios  ^  to  keep  the  point. 
Trios  of  queens,  knaves,  or  tens,  may  be  freely 


128 


PIQUET. 


discarded  from,  if,  in  order  to  keep  them,  a  card 
of  the  point  has  to  be  put  out. 


With  these  cards  the  elder  hand  should  not 
keep  his  three  queens,  but  should  throw  the  clubs 
and  the  diamond,  and  retain  the  other  two  suits 
unbroken. 


Example  IV. 

Discarding  from  a  trio,  iit  preference  to  throwing 
froin  the  point,  or  to  leaving  a  card. 


If  the  elder  hand  keeps  his  knaves  he  must 
either  throw  a  card  from  his  point  or  leave  a  card. 
Neither  course  is  advisable.  The  general  rule  is 
not  to  break  into  the  point;  and  it  would  be 
dana:erous  for  the  elder  hand  to  leave  a  card  with 


PIQUET. 


I2g 


two  seven-card  points,  a  quint,  three  aces,  three 
kings,  and  three  queens  against  him.  He  must 
sacrifice  the  knaves  to  keep  his  point,  by  which 
means  he  will,  at  all  events,  divide  the  cards.  His 
proper  discard  is  the  heart  and  the  four  diamonds. 


Example  V. 

Discarding  from    a    trio,    in     order    io    keep    the 

poitit.      Going  for  two  siiits,  with  a  better  chance 

of  the  cards. 


The  elder  hand  has  three  queens,  and  there  is 
no  great  score  against  him.  Notwithstanding  this, 
he  should  not  part  with  the  eight  of  his  point 
(diamonds)  to  keep  the  queens,  but  should  dis- 
card the  spades  and  hearts.  By  sacrificing  the 
queens  he  gives  up  a  chance  of  fourteen ;  but  by 
keeping  the  eight  of  diamonds  he  increases  his 
chance  of  scoring  the  point,  and  he  improves 
his  chance  of  winning  tricks  in  play. 

It  may  be  stated  generally,  that  with  ace,  king, 
queen,  and  a  small  card  of  a  suit,  and  three 
queens,  or  three  knaves,  or  three  tens  not  good 
against  the  cards,  and  such  other  cards  that  the 

K 


130 


PIQUET. 


player  must  cither  discard  one  of  these  or  the 
small  card  of  the  point,  the  game  is  to  keep 
the  point. 

Example  VI. 

Discarding  from  a  point  7vhicli  retnaifis  good 
against  the  cards. 

It  is  hardly  necessary  to  state  that  the  ob- 
jection to  throwing  a  card  from  the  point  does 
not  apply  if,  after  the  discard,  the  point  still 
remains  cood  against  the  cards. 


The  discard,  elder  hand,  is  seven  of  spades,  the 
two  hearts,  the  club,  and  the  diamond,  for  the 
reasons  already  given. 

If  the  club  or  the  diamond  were  the  seven,  the 
discard  is  less  easy ;  most  players  would  leave  a 
card  instead  of  throwing  one  of  the  point. 


Example  VI I. 


Discarding  from  loiv  trios,    to  divide  or  win   the 

cards.       Giving   up    the  point,   younger   ha?id,    in 

order  to  keep  suits  guarded. 

It  is  seldom  right  to  throw  out  an  ace,  or  a 


PIQUET.  131 

king,  in  order  to  carry  three  queens,  knaves,  or 
tens,  if  by  so  doing  the  loss  of  the  cards  is 
risked. 

The  principal  exception  is  when  one  named 
card  taken  in  gives  a  good  chance  of  a  pique 
or  a  repique ;  the  cards  ought  then  generally  to 
be  risked,  subject  however  to  the  state  of  the 
score,  a  safe  discard  being  preferable  as  a  rule 
when  ahead. 


The  elder  hand  should  discard  the  clubs  and 
diamonds  for  the  reasons  already  given. 

The  younger  hand's  discard  is  doubtful :  on  the 
whole,  it  seems  safest  for  him  to  give  up  the  point, 
and  to  discard  three  spades,  keeping  all  his  suits 
guarded,  and  going  for  the  chance  of  queens  and 
of  dividing  the  cards. 

In  the  above  hand,  substitute  the  ten  of 
spades  for  the  seven.  The  elder  hand  should 
then  keep  the  spades  and  the  queens.  The 
younger  hand  should  throw  out  the  three  clubs, 
unless  very  backward  in  the  score. 

K2 


132 


PIQUET. 


Example  VIII. 
Discarding  fro7n  low  qtiaiorzes,  to  divide  or  7i'in 
the  cards. 
If  the  loss  of  the  cards  is  risked  by  keeping  qua- 
torzes  of  knaves  or  tens,  it  is  generally  the  game  to 
sacrifice  the  quatorze.  Younger  hand,  especially, 
should  not  put  out  a  high  card,  to  keep  a  low  qua- 
torze, when  there  is  a  superior  quatorze  against  him. 


The  younger  hand  should  discard  knave  of  hearts, 
and  knave,  nine  of  diamonds.  He  sacrifices  the 
knaves  to  keep  his  point,  and  a  card  of  entry  in  every 
suit.  By  discarding  thus,  he  must  at  least  divide  the 
cards;  the  great  probability  is  that  he  will  win  them. 


Example  IX. 

Discarding   a    quint   mi7ior,    elder   hajtd,  for   the 

cha7ice  of  the  cards.      Keepitig  the  quint,  younger 

hand.,  as  a  protection  against  a  pique. 


PIQUET. 


133 


With  a  quart  major  in  one  suit,  a  quint  minor 
in  another,  and  small  cards  in  the  third  and 
fourth  suits,  it  would  generally  be  right,  elder 
hand,  to  put  out  the  quint  minor  in  preference 
to  breaking  up  the  quart  major.  Keeping  the 
quint  minor  will  probably  result  in  loss  of  the 
cards,  i.e.,  in  a  loss  of  over  twenty  points  for  a 
gain  of  fifteen. 

But  if  one  of  the  three  outside  cards  is  a 
knave,  and  the  cards  of  the  fourth  suit  are  such 
that  the  quint  minor  is  good  against  the  cards,  it 
would,  in  most  cases,  be  right  to  keep  the  quint 
and  the  knaves,  as  the  fourth  knave  gives  a  good 
chance  of  a  repique. 

The  younger  hand,  in  the  case  first  stated, 
should  not  part  with  any  of  his  quint.  He  has 
but  little  chance  of  saving  the  cards,  and  should 
throw  out  his  three  ragged  cards,  keeping  the 
quart  and  the  quint  in  hopes  of  saving  a  pique 
by  his  point  or  sequence. 


Example  X. 
A  similar  case  {see  Example  IX.) 


The  elder  hand  here  should  throw  out  the  five 


134  PIQUET. 

small  diamonds,  as,  by  keeping  them,  and  throw- 
ing the  high  cards  from  the  other  suits,  he  would 
probably  lose  the  cards,  and  a  number  of  points 
in  play.  He  would  also  give  up  a  chance  of  a 
quatorze  of  queens. 

It  may  be  objected  that,  by  discarding  in  the 
way  proposed,  the  elder  hand  runs  the  risk  of 
being  repiqued,  there  being  two  minor  quints 
against  him.  It  is,  however,  very  improbable 
that  the  younger  hand  can  (or  will),  carry  two 
minor  quints. 

The  younger  hand  discard  must  be  conceived 
on  different  principles.  He  must  play  on  the 
defensive,  and  give  up  what  small  chance  he  has 
of  the  cards  in  order  to  make  sure  of  saving  a 
repique.  His  discard  will,  therefore,  be  ace,  king 
of  hearts,  and  knave  of  clubs. 


Example  XL 
Discarding  for  the  cards. 


4\* 


In  this  hand,  the  cards  are  of  more  importance 
than  the  point ;  the  elder  hand  discard  should, 
therefore,  be  queen  and  four  small  spades,  carrying 


PIQUET.  135 

three  kings  and  three  unbroken  suits.  By  dis- 
carding thus,  if  he  fails  to  take  in  the  fourth 
king,  he  still  has  a  good  chance  of  winning  the 
cards ;  but  if  he  keeps  the  six-card  suit,  and  fails 
to  take  in  the  ace  of  spades,  he  will  have  a  very 
poor  chance  of  the  cards,  after  having  thrown  out 
king,  queen  of  hearts,  knave  of  clubs,  and  king, 
nine  of  diamonds. 


Example  XII. 
Discarding  for  the  cards. 


This  is  a  similar  case  to  the  last,  but  not  so 
pronounced.  Most  players  would  discard  nine 
of  spades  and  king,  nine,  eight,  seven  of  clubs. 
If  the  elder  hand  retains  the  point  in  clubs,  and 
throws  out  four  high  cards  in  other  suits,  his 
chance  of  winning  the  cards  is  diminished.  Some 
players  prefer  to  discard  the  hearts  and  diamonds. 


Example  XIII. 

Discarding  for  the  cards. 

If  the  younger  hand  has  three  of  each  suit  dealt 
him,  and  is  guarded  in  each  suit,  and  can  calculate 


136 


PIQUET. 


on  dividing  the  cards,  he  should  not  discard  more 
than  one  card,  when,  by  so  doing,  he  runs  the  risk 
of  losing  the  cards.  This  rule  applies  especially 
when  the  score  renders  it  advisable  to  keep  the 
adversary  back.  It  does  not  apply  to  cases  where 
the  younger  hand,  being  very  backward  in  the 
score,  must  go  for  a  great  game. 


The  younger  hand  should  only  take  one  card, 
discarding  the  seven  of  spades,  for  the  reason 
already  given. 


Example  XIV. 

Discarding  for  a  capot. 

If  the  elder  hand  has  such  cards  that  he  can 
win  eleven  tricks  certain,  it  is  often  right  for 
him  to  discard  only  one  card,  the  losing  card. 
Then,  if  he  takes  in  to  one  of  his  guarded  suits, 
he  has  a  lay  down  capot ;  if  not,  he  will  very 
likely  put  his  adversary  to  a  card.  No  example 
of  such  a  combination  is  necessary,  as,  once 
pointed  out,  the  discard  is  obvious. 


PIQUET. 


137 


The    following    case    applies    to    the    younger 
hand : — 


The  younger  hand  should  discard  queen,  ten, 
eight  of  diamonds,  for  the  chance  of  a  capot. 
He  is  not  unlikely  to  succeed  if  he  happens 
to  strengthen  the  spade  or  heart  suit  when  he 
takes  in. 


Example  XV. 
Keeping  imhroken  suits. 


Here  the  elder  hand  should  throw  out  the  five 
clubs,  and  keep  three  unbroken  suits.  He  has  a 
better  chance  of  scoring  points  in  jilay  than  by 
discarding  from  the  other  three  suits. 


138 


PIQUET. 


Example  XVL 
Keeping  imbrokeji  suifs. 


The  elder  hand  discard  is  tierce  minor  in  clubs, 
and  queen,  ten  of  diamonds,  leaving  the  spades 
intact.  It  would  be  less  advantageous  to  discard 
one  diamond  and  one  spade,  as  thus  three  suits 
are  broken  into. 


Example  XVII. 

Throwing  a  li'hole  suit,  yoiaiger  hand,  to  keep 
three  unbroken  suits. 


In  this  case,  the  younger  hand  should  throw  the 
spades,  keeping  three  unbroken  suits,  with  three 
aces  and  three  queens. 


PIQUET. 


139 


Example  XVIII. 

Keeping  unbroken  suits.     Discarding  on  the  chafice 

of  saving  a  pique. 


The  younger  hand  should  discard  the  three 
small  clubs,  keeping  three  unbroken  suits.  He 
might  also  keep  three  suits  by  discarding  the 
hearts ;  but  there  is  a  pique  against  him,  and  he 
ought  not  to  part  with  the  hearts,  as  they  give 
him  a  chance  of  a  quart,  which  saves  the  pique. 


Example    XIX. 
LeavitiiT  a  card. 


Here  the  elder  hand  should  keep  his  point  and 
kings,  and  leave  a  card. 

Similarly,  with  ace,  king,  and  four  small  cards 
of  a  suit,  and  two  other  kings,  the  game  would  be 


I40 


PIQUET. 


to  leave  a  card,  if  there  is  no  repique  against  the 
elder  hand. 


Example    XX. 
Leaving  a  card. 


Here  the  elder  hand  should  discard  nine  of 
spades,  nine  of  clubs,  and  king,  queen  of  dia- 
monds, leaving  a  card.  His  point,  sequence,  and 
aces  are  good  against  the  cards,  and  he  has  a 
certain  pique ;  but  if  he  discards  one  of  his 
hearts,  he  may  not  get  the  point,  as  there  are 
three  six-card  suits  against  him. 

The  younger  hand  should  also  leave  a  card, 
throwing  the  two  nines,  and  keeping  his  point, 
three  aces,  and  the  guard  in  diamonds. 


Example  XXI. 

Leaving  cards,  younger  hand. 

.     The  main  consideration  for  the  younger  hand, 
"when    in    doubt    as    to    taking   all    his    cards,   is 


PIQUET. 


141 


whether    the    card    or   cards    taken    will    probably 
be  more  valuable  than  those  thrown. 


The  younger  hand  discard  is  nine,  eight  of 
spades,  leaving  a  card.  If  one  of  the  guards  to 
hearts  or  diamonds  is  thrown,  a  risk  is  run  of 
taking  in  a  less  valuable  card.  By  discarding  only 
two  cards  and  retaining  the  guards,  the  younger 
hand  has  a  moral  certainty  of  dividing  the  cards. 


Example  XXII. 
Leaving  a  card,  youfiger  hand. 


The  younger  hand  should  throw  out  ten  of 
spades,  and  ten  of  clubs,  and  leave  a  card, 
keeping  himself  guarded  everywhere,  and  going 
for  two  unbroken  suits  of  sequence  cards. 


142 


PIQUET. 


Example  XXIII. 

Leaving  a  card  7viih  a  repique  against. 

This,   as  a  rule,   can   only   be  justified  by  the 
state  of  the  score. 


It  is  the  last  hand  of  the  partie.  Score : 
A  (elder  hand),  68;    B  (younger  hand),   155. 

There  is  a  repique  against  B. 

B  discards  knave,  eight  of  clubs,  and  is 
doubtful  about  leaving  a  card.  If  he  can  make 
certain  of  not  losing  the  partie,  he  should  only 
discard  two  cards. 

A's  highest  score  if  he  carries  all  he  possibly 
can,  and  B  takes  in  very  badly,  will  be  105, 
viz.,  six  diamonds  (good  for  twenty -one),  a 
quart  in  hearts,  and  four  tens  (good  for  four- 
teen), which,  together  with  sixty  for  the  repique, 
score  99.     He  may  also  make  six  in  play. 

In  this  case  B  makes  nine  in  play,  and  the 
cards,  nineteen. 

The  scores  will  therefore  be.  A,   173;  B,   174; 
under  the  most  unfavourable  circumstances. 
^.      B,    having    a    certainty    in    hand,    should    not 
risk  the  partie. 


PIQUET.  143 

Example  XXIV. 
Discarding  for  sequence. 

With  two  suits  of  nearly  equal  value,  the  one 
should  be  selected  for  point  which  gives  the  best 
chance  of  a  sequence. 


The  elder  hand  should  throw  out  eight  of 
spades,  ten,  nine  of  clubs,  and  knave,  nine  of 
diamonds,  and  keep  thirty -nine  in  hearts  for 
point,  rather  than  forty  in  clubs.  The  reason  is, 
that  one  card,  viz.,  the  knave  of  hearts,  if  taken 
in,  gives  a  quint,  whereas  a  quint  cannot  be  held 
in  clubs  without  drawing  two  cards ;  also,  by 
keeping  the  hearts,  there  is  a  better  chance  of 
winning  the  cards. 

Similarly,  a  player  holding  ace,  queen,  nine, 
eight,  seven,  in  one  suit,  and  ace,  knave,  nine, 
eight,  seven,  in  another,  should  keep  the  latter. 
The  chance  of  taking  king  of  one  or  the  other 
suit  is  equal,  and,  consequently,  the  chance  of  the 
cards  is  equal ;  but  in  one  case  a  ten  taken  in 
gives  a  quint,  in  the  other  it  does  not. 

If  the  ten  is  substituted  for  the  nine  in  both 
suits,  the  discard  is  determined  on  the  same 
j)rinciple. 


-% 


144 


PIQUET. 


Example  XXV. 
Discarding  for  seqiie?ice. 


The  elder  hand  should  discard  nine  of  spades, 
king,  queen,  knave  of  hearts,  and  nine  of  clubs. 
The  diamonds  are  kept  for  point  in  preference 
to  the  hearts,  because,  in  the  diamond  suit,  one 
of  two  named  cards  taken  in  gives  a  quint, 
whereas,  in  the  heart  suit,  the  quint  can  only 
be  completed  by  one  named  card ;  and,  which- 
ever suit  is  kept,  the  chance  of  making  the  cards 
is  not  affected. 


Example  XXVI. 
Discarding  for  sequence. 


The   younger   hand  must   take  in   a  club   or   a 
'king  to  save  a  repique.     He  should  discard  queen. 


PIQUET. 


M5 


ten  of  spades,  and  eight  of  clubs,  keeping  two 
unbroken  suits,  both  guarded,  and  both  giving 
him  a  chance  of  a  good  sequence  if  he  takes  in 
a  club.  He  should  on  no  account  discard  a  heart 
in  order  to  keep  his  three  tens. 


Example  XXVI L 
Discarding  for  a  quatorze. 


The  proper  discard,  elder  hand,  seems  to  be 
quart  minor  in  spades  and  ace  of  clubs,  for  the 
following  reasons : — It  is  only  5  to  4  against  taking 
queen  or  knave  of  spades.  There  are  also  two 
combinations  in  diamonds  (viz.,  ace,  ten ;  or  ten, 
nine),  either  of  which  gives  the  elder  hand  a 
quint ;  and,  all  these  circumstances  being  con- 
sidered, there  is  a  probability  of  a  good  score 
by  discarding  as  proposed.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  the  elder  hand  discards  the  four  spades  only, 
he  may  leave  one  of  the  following  cards  :  king  of 
clubs,  ace  of  diamonds,  or,  ace,  queen,  or  knave 
of  spades;    and  in  any  of  these  cases  he  would, 

L 


146 


PIQUET. 


probably,   lose  more  points   than   by  parting  with 
the  ace  of  clubs. 

There  is  another  way  of  discarding  the  hand, 
viz.,  by  putting  out  the  spades  and  one  heart.  By 
so  doing,  the  elder  hand  runs  the  risk  of  putting 
out  fourteen  points  on  a  chance  which  is  but 
5  to  4  against  liim,  viz.,  of  taking  queen  or  knave 
of  spades. 


Example  XXVIII. 
Discarding:;  to  the  score. 


The  discard  here,  elder  hand,  depends  greatly 
on  the  state  of  the  score. 

At  the  commencement  of  a  partie  the  discard 
is  seven  of  spades,  nine  of  hearts,  and  nine  of 
diamonds,  leaving  two  cards.  Although  the  point 
as  dealt  is  good  against  the  cards,  and  is  not 
necessarily  good  after  the  discard  of  the  seven 
of  spades,  it  is  better  to  throw  that  card  than 
to  leave  a  third  card,  as,  in  order  to  repique  the 
adversary,  it  is  necessary  to  break  up  his  septieme 
in  clubs.     If  the  elder  hand  succeeds  in  this,  his 


PIQUET.  147 

point  and  sequence  will  be  good,  notwithstanding 
the  discard  of  the  spade. 

If,  in  the  last  hand  of  a  partie,  the  elder  hand  is 
only  playing  for  a  pique  and  the  cards,  he  should 
discard  one  of  his  aces  (not  the  ace  of  spades),  in 
addition  to  the  three  cards  previously  directed  to 
be  thrown.  He  thus  leaves  only  one  card,  and 
increases  his  chance  of  breaking  the  septieme. 
The  fourth  ace  is  useless  at  this  score,  as  the 
elder  hand  wins  the  partie  without  it,  if  he  takes 
a  club. 

If  the  elder  hand  only  wants  forty-two  to  make 
sure  of  the  partie,  his  discard  should  be  the  two 
nines,  as  he  can  then  score  forty-two  out  of  his 
own  hand  for  certain.  This,  of  course,  means 
that  forty-two  wins  the  partie,  notwithstanding  the 
younger  has  a  septieme  and  makes  three  points 
in  play. 

If  the  elder  hand's  score  is  such  that  he  must 
win  the  partie  unless  there  is  a  septibme  against 
him,  he  should  keep  the  spade  suit  and  throw 
out  the  other  cards. 


Example  XXIX. 
Discarding  to  the  score. 


Before  discarding,  especially  in  the  fifth  and 
sixth  hands,  add  up  the  score,  and  ascertain  how 
many  points  each  player  requires. 

L2 


148 


PIQUET. 


The  show  of  the  elder  hand  is  twenty-eight 
points  {i.e.,  it  is  about  an  even  chance  that  the 
elder  scores  twenty-eight,  or  more) ;  the  show  of 
the  younger  hand  is  fourteen  points  {see  p.  199). 
By  bearing  this  in  mind,  a  player  can  easily  tell 
whether  he  has  the  best  of  the  partie  or  not. 
If  he  has,  he  should  discard  for  a  safe  and 
moderate  game ;  but,  if  far  behind,  he  should 
make  a  bold  discard  for  a  pique  or  a  repique, 
and  should  give  up  all  consideration  of  winning 
the  cards. 


The  elder  hand,  at  the  beginning  of  a  partie, 
should  discard  ten,  nine,  eight,  seven  of  hearts, 
and  nine  of  diamonds.  But  if  it  is  the  last  hand 
of  the  partie,  and  a  repique  is  necessary  to  win, 
the  discard  is  king  of  spades,  tierce  major  in  clubs, 
and  nine  of  diamonds,  keeping  the  quint  and  the 
three  knaves. 

Similarly,  if  the  adversary  is  well  ahead,  in  the 
last  hand  or  last  hand  but  one,  a  player  with  a 
quart  to  a  queen  or  knave,  and  three  queens, 
knaves,  or  tens,  should  make  a  push  for  the 
partie,  by  keeping  the  quart  and  the  trio. 


PIQUET. 


149 


Example  XXX. 
Discarding  to  the  score. 


\7 "^ 

The  discard  of  the  younger  hand,  at  the  com- 
mencement of  a  partie,  would  be  the  three  dia- 
monds. But  if,  in  the  last  hand,  he  were  far 
behind  in  the  score,  he  should  put  out  king  of 
and  queen,  nine  of  diamonds,  on  the 
of  drawing  the  fourth  ten,  which  would 
give  him  a  repique.  Some  players  would  go  for 
the  repique  at  the  beginning  of  a  partie ;  but  the 
expediency  of  playing  so  forward  a  game  is  doubtful. 


hearts, 
chance 


Example  XXXI. 
Discarding  to  the  score. 


At  the  bcginnmg  of  a  partie,  the  younger  hand 
should  discard  queen,  nine,  eight  of  spades ;  but 


148 


PIQUET. 


The  sliow  of  the  elder  hand  is  twenty-eight 
points  {i.e.,  it  is  about  an  even  chance  that  the 
elder  scores  twenty-eight,  or  more) ;  the  show  of 
the  younger  hand  is  fourteen  points  {see  p.  iqq). 

ERRATUM. 
Page  148.  line  4  ;  and  page  173,  line  7  ;  for  •'  ItH)  "  read  •'  203." 

and  should  give  up  all  consideration  of  winning 
the  cards. 


The  elder  hand,  at  the  beginning  of  a  partie, 
should  discard  ten,  nine,  eight,  seven  of  hearts, 
and  nine  of  diamonds.  But  if  it  is  the  last  hand 
of  the  partie,  and  a  repique  is  necessary  to  win, 
the  discard  is  king  of  spades,  tierce  major  in  clubs, 
and  nine  of  diamonds,  keeping  the  quint  and  the 
three  knaves. 

Similarly,  if  the  adversary  is  well  ahead,  in  the 
last  hand  or  last  hand  but  one,  a  jolayer  with  a 
quart  to  a  queen  or  knave,  and  three  queens, 
knaves,  or  tens,  should  make  a  push  for  the 
partie,  by  keeping  the  quart  and  the  trio. 


PIQUET, 


149 


Example  XXX. 
Discarding  to  the  score. 


The  discard  of  the  younger  hand,  at  the  com- 
mencement of  a  partie,  would  be  the  three  dia- 
monds. But  if,  in  the  last  hand,  he  were  far 
behind  in  the  score,  he  should  put  out  king  of 
hearts,  and  queen,  nine  of  diamonds,  on  the 
chance  of  drawing  the  fourth  ten,  which  would 
give  him  a  repique.  Some  players  would  go  for 
the  repique  at  the  beginning  of  a  partie ;  but  the 
expediency  of  playing  so  forward  a  game  is  doubtful. 


Example  XXXI. 
Discardimr  to  the  score. 


At  the  beginnmg  of  a  partie,  the  younger  hand 
should  discard  queen,  nine,  eight  of  spades ;  but 


15° 


PIQUET. 


if,  in  the  last  hand  of  the  partie,  his  score  were 
eighty-three,  he  should  go  for  two  chances  of  a 
quint  to  save  the  rubicon,  and  discard  knave  of 
hearts,  king  of  clubs,  and  ten  of  diamonds. 


Example  XXXII. 
Discardms:  to  the  score. 


At  love-all,  the  younger  hand  would  discard  ace, 
nine,  eight  of  clubs.  In  this  hand  it  is  more  im- 
portant to  keep  the  spades  guarded  and  the  knaves 
than  to  preserve  the  four-card  point  in  clubs. 

Most  players  would  make  the  same  discard  at 
all  scores,  it  being  very  unlikely  that  the  elder 
hand  can  carry  a  pique.  Some,  however,  in  the 
last  hand,  if  only  a  pique  against  the  hand  can 
win  the  partie,  would  discard  the  spades,  because 
then  either  nine  of  diamonds  or  ten  of  clubs  taken 
in  saves  a  pique.  At  this  score  the  sacrifice  of  the 
knaves  is  of  little  consequence,  as  they  are  useless 
unless  the  younger  hand  pulls  a  king,  in  which 
event  he  is  certain  to  win  the  partie. 


PIQUET. 


151 


Example    XXXIII. 
A  doubtful  discard. 


This  hand  (elder)  admits  of  several  discards. 
Some  players  would  sacrifice  the  knaves,  and 
throw  knave,  eight,  seven  of  clubs,  and  knave, 
seven  of  diamonds.  Others  would  throw  king, 
ten,  eight  of  spades,  seven  of  clubs,  and  seven  ot 
diamonds ;  or,  king,  ten,  eight  of  spades,  ace  of 
hearts,  and  seven  of  diamonds ;  or,  ace  of  hearts, 
ace,  eight,  seven  of  clubs,  and  seven  of  diamonds. 

The  first  mode  of  discarding  is  preferred  by 
the  Author,  unless  the  game  is  desperate,  when 
the  last  way  of  discarding  should  be  resorted  to. 


152  PIQUET. 


CALLING. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

Calling  is  not  such  a  simple  matter  as  at  first 
sight  appears. 

Your  object  is  to  reckon  all  you  can  (except 
as  will  be  pointed  out),  and  at  the  same  time 
not  to  expose  your  hand  more  than  necessary, 
as  by  informing  your  adversary  of  the  contents 
of  your  hand,  you  materially  assist  him  in  play- 
ing the  cards. 

After  taking  in,  and  before  calling,  look 
through  your  hand,  and,  if  your  memory  is  at 
fault,  through  your  discard  also,  to  ascertain 
what  you  have  good,  or  equal,  or  what  remains 
good  against  you. 

CALLING    THE    POINT. 

You  should  not  thoughtlessly  call  your  best 
suit  for  point,  when  you  have  two  points.  You 
should  consider  which  of  the  two  it  is  to  your 
advantage  to  declare. 

For  example : — You  (elder  hand)  have  king, 
queen,  knave,  eight  of  hearts ;  and  ace,  queen, 
ten,  eight  of  clubs.  You  call  four  cards,  allowed 
to  be  good.  You  propose  to  attack  in  hearts ; 
you  should  therefore  declare  that  suit  for  point. 


PIQUET.  153 

To  carry  the  illustration  a  step  further.  Your 
other  cards  are  ace  of  spades,  and  three  diamonds. 

You  have  put  out  knave,  nine,  eight  of  spades, 
and  two  diamonds. 

You  know,  or  ought  to  know,  that  thirty-eight, 
in  hearts,  is  good  against  the  cards.  You  call 
four  cards,  and  are  told  that  four  cards  are 
equal.  Your  point  in  clubs  makes  thirty-nine. 
But  having  ascertained  that  thirty-eight  is  good, 
you  declare  the  point  in  hearts.  Your  adversary 
may  then  suppose  that  you  are  out  in  clubs,  and 
may  therefore  play  the  cards  to  a  disadvantage. 

It  may  be  asked.  If  you  know  your  point  is 
good,  why  not  declare  it  at  once  ? 

The  answer  is  that,  when  you  may  hold  the 
same  number  of  cards  in  more  than  one  suit,  it 
is  generally  advisable  to  call  the  number  of  cards 
of  your  point,  even  though  good  against  the  cards, 
in  hopes  of  compeUing  your  adversary  to  discover 
some  portion  of  his  hand  or  discard  by  his  reply. 
Thus : — You  have  forty-seven  in  one  suit,  and 
might  have  had  forty-five  in  another.  The  best 
point  the  younger  hand  can  hold  is  forty-six.  If 
to  your  call  of  "  Five  cards  "  he  replies,  "  Equal," 
you  know  five  cards  in  his  hand ;  if  he  replies, 
"Good,"  you  know  he  has  discarded  from  his 
point. 

Again:  —  If  any  four -card  point  which  the 
younger  hand  can  hold  must  be  good,  and  you 
have  a  point  of  thirty-one,  you  should  call  three 
cards,  though  holding  four.     You  may  thus  induce 


154  PIQUET. 

the  younger  hand  to  believe  you  have  three  cards 
in  each  suit,  and  may  consequently  gain  several 
points  in  play.  (For  an  example  of  a  thought- 
less call  of  four  cards,  see  p.  175.) 

REPLYING    TO    THE    CALL    OF    POINT. 

When  you  are  younger  hand,  and  the  elder  calls 
a  number  of  cards  for  point,  equal  to  yours,  you 
should  not  declare  the  equality  if  his  point  must 
be  good. 

Thus: — The  elder  hand  calls,  "Five  cards."  You 
have  already  noted  that  the  only  five-card  suit  he 
can  hold  is  ace,  queen,  knave,  ten,  eight  of  hearts, 
making  forty-nine.  Your  five-card  suit  (ace,  queen, 
knave,  ten,  seven)  only  makes  forty-eight.  You 
should  not  reply,  "  Equal"  to  the  call  of  five  cards, 
but  should  at  once  allow  five  cards  to  be  good. 

When  you  reply,  "  Not  good "  to  a  point,  you 
should  at  the  same  time  observe  in  which  suit 
the  call  is. 

For  example :  —  Elder  hand  calls  five  cards. 
You  have  already  seen  that  the  only  five-card 
point  he  can  hold  is  in  hearts.  You,  therefore, 
know  five  cards  in  his  hand  ;  this  knowledge  may 
be  of  great  use  to  you  in  playing  the  cards. 

Or :  —  Elder  hand  calls  five  cards  which  are 
equal.  He  may  then  decline  to  say  what  they 
make,  if  he  knows  your  five  cards  must  be  better 
than  his.  Nevertheless,  if  he  can  only  hold  one 
five -card  point,  you  know  what  the  cards  are. 
Or,   he    may   declare   that   his    cards   make,   say, 


PIQUET,  155 

forty-four.  Forty-four  is  not  good ;  all  the  same, 
you  know  that  his  point  consists  of  five  cards, 
without  an  ace,  and  ending  in  a  tierce  minor. 
You  will  thus  probably  be  able  to  tell  five  cards 
in  your  opponent's  hand. 

The  following  table,  if  learnt  by  heart,  will 
facilitate  a  knowledge  of  the  cards  of  a  point 
which  is  not  good  : — 

A  point  of  34  must  contain     "],  8,  9,  and  a  tenth  card. 

(  7>  8,  and  two  tenth  cards. 
"  J^     "  "        I  7i  8,  9,  and  an  ace. 

I  7,  9,  and  two  tenth  cards. 
"  -^       "  "        /  7,  8,  a  tenth  card,  and  an  ace. 

I  7,  and  three  tenth  cards. 
,,  37     ,1  >)        )  8,  9,  and  two  tenth  cards. 

'  7,  9,  a  tenth  card,  and  an  ace. 

(  8,  and  three  tenth  cards. 
,,  38     ,,  ,,        <  8,  9,  a  tenth  card,  and  an  ace. 

(  7,  two  tenth  cards,  and  an  ace. 

\  9,  and  three  tenth  cards. 

>)  39       >>  ;)  \ 

(  8,  two  tenth  cards,  and  an  ace. 

I  four  tenth  cards. 
,,  40     ,,  ,,        \ 

\  9,  two  tenth  cards,  and  an  ace. 

,,  41     ,,  ,,  three  tenth  cards  and  an  ace. 


For  points  from  forty-four  to  fifty-one  it  is  only 
necessary  to  add  a  tenth  card  to  these.  For 
example:  —  A  point  of  forty-eight  must  contain 
eight,  and  four  tenth  cards;  eight,  nine,  two  tenth 
cards,  and  an  ace ;  or  seven,  three  tenth  cards, 
and  an  ace.  Fifty  can  only  be  made  in  one 
way,  viz.,  with   nine,   three   tenth   cards,   and    an 


156  PIQUET, 

ace.  Six-card  points  follow  a  similar  rule ;  but 
for  large  points,  a  simpler  way  of  finding  the 
cards  that  compose  them  is  to  see  whether  you 
have  in  hand,  or  to  remember  whether  you  have 
in  discard,  the  remaining  cards  of  the  suit. 

CALLING    SEQUENCES. 

When,  elder  hand,  you  have  called  a  point, 
which  is  equal,  or  not  good,  and  you  can  con- 
sequently tell  that  your  sequence  in  some  other 
suit  is  not  good,  you  should  not  call  any  se- 
quence. 

For  instance: — Your  point  is  forty-one,  viz., 
ace,  king,  queen,  ten  of  spades.  It  is  not  good. 
The  only  better  point  against  you  is  quart  major 
and  one  small  diamond.  Your  best  sequence  is 
a  quart  to  a  queen  in  hearts.  You  should  not 
call  the  quart,  as  it  cannot  be  good  or  equal, 
and  by  calling  it  you  only  expose  your  hand. 
By  not  calling  it,  you  leave  it  doubtful  whether 
you  have  put  out  any  hearts  ;  and  this  may  be 
of  use  to  you  in  playing  the  cards. 

SINKING. 

If  there  is  anything  good  against  you,  or  equal, 
which  is  not  called,  you  will  probably  be  able  to 
discover  some  of  the  cards  your  adversary  has  put 
out  This  may  subsequently  assist  you  in  playing 
the  cards. 

But  you  must  not  conclude,  as  a  matter  of 
course,   that   your   adversary  has    discarded  what 


PIQUET.  157 

he  does  not  call.  Owing  to  the  advantage  in 
playing  the  cards  derived  from  knowing  the  ad- 
verse hand,  it  not  unfrequently  happens  that  your 
adversary  will  conceal  some  of  his  cards,  and  not 
call  them,  although  they  may  be  good.  He  puts 
up  with  the  loss  of  several  points  in  calling  his 
hand,  on  the  chance  of  afterwards  dividing  or 
winning  the  cards. 

You  should  be  on  your  guard  against  this 
manoeuvre  (called  si?iking).  It  is  especially 
resorted  to  when  a  player  has  a  suit  un- 
guarded, and  calling  all  he  holds  would  expose 
the  fact. 

Your  adversary,  for  instance,  is  a  player  who 
rarely  discards  from  his  point.  He  calls  five 
cards  (good  against  the  cards),  and  declares  five 
spades,  when  he  might  have  six.  You  should 
immediately  suspect  that  he  may  be  sinking  a 
card  of  his  point,  and  should  not  hesitate  to 
attack  him  in  another  suit  from  which  he  is 
likely  to  have  discarded,  and  in  which  you  have 
a  tenace.  The  game  being  for  him  to  keep  his 
other  suits  unbroken,  you  will  probably  find  him 
unguarded  in  the  suit  he  has  discarded. 

Or: — Your  adversary  may  hold  a  tierce  in  a 
suit  other  than  his  point.  The  tierce  is  good, 
or  equal,  and  he  does  not  call  it.  He  may 
have  put  it  out;  or,  he  may  be  unguarded  some- 
where, and  calling  the  tierce  would  render  this 
evident;  or,  he  may  wish  you  to  attack  him  in 
the  suit  in  which  he  holds   the  tierce,  and  may 


158 


PIQUET. 


be  trying  to  make  you  think  he  has  put  out 
that  suit. 

Again: — -He  may  have  a  quart  to  a  knave,  and 
may  only  call  a  tierce  to  a  knave,  which  is  good, 
or  equal.  Or,  he  may  have  a  trio  which  he  does 
not  call ;  or,  a  quatorze,  and  may  only  call  a  trio. 

It  will  be  for  you  to  judge  of  the  probabilities 
in  these  and  similar  cases,  and  to  act  accordingly. 
You  should  especially  suspect  an  experienced 
player  of  concealing  cards  which,  if  called,  would 
reveal  weakness,  affecting  the  play  of  the  cards, 
in  other  places. 

It  should  be  added,  that  it  is  useless  to  practise 
the  stratagem  of  sinking  cards  against  an  indifferent 
player  who  does  not  count  your  hand. 


EXAMPLES    OF    SINKING. 

Example  I. 

The  elder  hand,  having  put  out  three  small 
hearts  and  two  small  clubs,  holds  the  following 
cards  : — 


His  point  and  quart  major  are  admitted  to  be 
good.  He  then  proceeds  to  call  a  tierce  to  a 
king  in  diamonds  (sinking  the  ten  of  diamond.s — 


PIQUET. 


159 


this  must  be  done  without  hesitation),  in  order 
to  lead  his  opponent  to  imagine  that  the  ten  of 
diamonds  has  been  discarded,  and  that  the  king 
of  hearts  is  guarded.  He  then  calls  three  kings, 
which  are  not  good.  He  next  leads  the  spades, 
and  then  the  king  of  diamonds,  which  the  ad- 
versary wins,  and  leads  clubs.  To  the  third 
club,  the  elder  hand  throws  (without  hesitation) 
the  knave  of  diamonds,  and  to  the  fourth  club,  the 
queen  of  diamonds.  Suppose  the  younger  hand 
now  remains  with  ace,  queen  of  hearts,  and  the 
elder  with  king  of  hearts  and  ten  of  diamonds. 
If  the  younger  hand,  believing  the  elder  to  have 
two  hearts  (as  would  seem  to  him  must  be  the 
case,  if  unacquainted  with  the  riise)^  leads  his 
queen,  in  order  to  win  the  last  trick,  the  elder 
hand  makes  both  tricks  and  wins  the  cards. 


Example  H. 


The  elder  hand's  point  is  equal,  the  younger 
having  seven  hearts.  The  elder  also  has  four 
kings,  good  against  the  cards ;  but,  having  put 
out  a  ten,  his  three  aces  and  three  kings  are 
also  good  against  the  cards. 


i6o 


PIQUET. 


If  he  calls  four  kings,  he  cannot  capot  his 
adversary.  He,  therefore,  calls  three  aces  and 
three  kings,  and  declares  that  he  does  not 
reckon  the  king  of  hearts.  He  then  leads  his 
spades,  his  ace,  king  of  clubs,  and  ace,  king  of 
diamonds.  His  adversary  will  have  to  keep  one 
card,  and,  as  he  believes  the  king  of  hearts  to 
be  out,  he  will  probably  keep  either  the  queen 
of  clubs  or  of  diamonds,  and  throw  away  the  ace 
of  hearts.  If  he  does  so,  he  is  capoted.  The 
elder  hand  gives  up  eleven  points  by  sinking  a 
king,  with  the  moral  certainty  (except  against  a 
very  acute  or  a  very  stupid  player)  of  gaining 
thirty-two. 


Example  III. 
A  (Eider  Hand). 


]3  (Younger  Hand) 


PIQUET,  l6t 

A  has  discarded  seven  of  spades ;  nine,  seven 
of  clubs ;   and  knave,  seven  of  diamonds. 

A's  point  is  not  good ;  his  tierce  is  equal.  A 
does  not  call  three  aces ;  B  reckons  point,  and 
three  tens. 

A  leads  the  hearts  and  spades,  and  remains 
with  two  cards,  viz.,  ace,  queen  of  clubs. 

B  remains  with  king,  knave  of  clubs,  and  ace 
of  diamonds,  and  has  yet  to  play  one  card. 

If,  in  consequence  of  aces  not  having  been 
called,  B  believes  the  ace  of  clubs  to  be  out, 
he  will  play  knave  of  clubs,  when  A  will  lead 
ace  of  clubs,  and  B  will  be  capoted. 

A  {:o7/J>  such  as  this  will  generally  succeed  in 
practice ;  but  it  is  difficult  to  see  with  what 
cards  A  could  have  gone  out  to  justify  the  dis- 
card of  the  ace  of  clubs. 

B  is  in  a  very  awkward  position.  Probably 
his  best  game  is  to  keep  the  clubs,  as  then  he 
saves  the  capot,  unless  A  has  thrown  four  clubs 
and  a  spade,  a  most  unlikely  discard. 

When  put  to  a  card,  the  general  rule  is  to  count 
the  cards  remaining  against  (see  pp.  170,  171). 
There  is  one  other  consideration,  viz.,  what  cards 
the  adversary  cannot  in  reason  have  discarded. 
Thus: — If  a  player  might  have  a  quart  which  he 
does  not  call,  and  his  hand  is  such  that  it  would 
have  been  very  bad  play  to  discard  from  a  quart, 
the  presumption  is  he  did  not  go  out  with  the 
quart  originally,  and  therefore  that  he  has  taken 
in  to  that  suit  {compare  Example  IV.,  pp.  162,  163). 

M 


l62 


PIQUET. 


EXAMPLK    IV. 
A  (Elder  Hand) 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  nine  of  clubs ;  and  ten,  nine 
of  diamonds. 

A  calls  a  point  of  four  cards.  He  is  therefore 
out  in  hearts  and  diamonds.  He  has  probably 
gone  for  clubs  and  queens.  The  best  four-card 
point  he  can  hold  makes  thirty-eight. 

B  says,  "  Making?  "  A  replies,  "  Making  eight." 
B  says,  "Not  good." 

The  tierce  major  is  equal.  B  shows  ace,  knave, 
ten,  eight  of  spades,  for  point,  sinking  the  king, 
and  reckons  three  aces. 

A  makes  four  tricks  in  clubs.  To  the  fourth 
club  B  plays  eight  of  spades. 


PIQUET. 


163 


A  then  leads  king  of  diamonds,  won  by  B  with 
the  ace. 

B  leads  tierce  major  in  hearts.  To  the  third  heart 
A,  believing  king  of  spades  to  be  out,  throws  seven 
of  spades.      B  wins  all  the  remaining  tricks. 

A  similar  feature  is  to  be  noticed  here  as  in 
the  previous  example.  It  is  clear  that  B  has  a 
club  and  a  diamond  out.  There  is  no  conceiv- 
able combination  of  cards  with  which  it  would 
be  right  for  B  to  discard  a  club,  a  diamond,  and 
king  of  spades.  A  should  see  that  there  is  some- 
thing wrong ;  and,  unless  he  thinks  B  has  put 
out  the  king  of  spades  by  mistake,  should  keep 
himself  doubly  guarded  in  spades. 


Example  V. 
A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

U  2 


1 64  PIQUET. 

A  has  discarded  nine,  eight,  seven  of  hearts ; 
and  eight,  seven  of  clubs. 

He  went  out  with  the  diamonds  and  three 
queens,  and  took  in  king,  ten  of  spades ;  ace  of 
hearts ;  and  knave,  ten  of  clubs. 

B's  discard  was  knave,  ten  of  hearts ;  and  nine 
of  clubs.  He  kept  a  six  -  card  point  in  spades ; 
ace  of  clubs  ;  and  king,  nine  of  diamonds.  He 
took  in  king  of  hearts  ;  king  of  clubs ;  and  seven 
of  diamonds. 

It  is  the  last  hand  of  the  partie.  A's  score 
is  seventy  -  eight ;  B's  score  is  a  hundred  and 
four. 

It  is  obvious  that  B  must  win  the  partie,  even 
if  he  does  not  reckon  his  point.  All  A  can  score, 
under  the  most  favourable  circumstances,  is  thirty- 
three,  making  him  iii.  B  must  make  six  in  play; 
and  this,  with  his  three  kings,  good  against  the 
cards,  will  make  him   113. 

B  should  therefore  sacrifice  his  score  for  point, 
as,  if  he  can  make  it  appear  that  he  is  guarded  in 
hearts,  and  is  therefore  not  attacked  in  that  suit, 
he  can  divide  the  cards,  when  A  will  be  rubiconed. 
A  announces  five  cards.  B  might  ask  how  many 
they  make,  and  score  the  point,  sinking  one  spade, 
if  A  declares  hearts.  B  will  immediately  be  sus- 
pected, will  be  attacked  in  hearts,  and  A  will  save 
the  rubicon,  with  two  tierces,  nine  in  play,  and  the 
cards. 

B  should  sink  the  whole  of  his  point,  and  allow 
five  cards  to  be  good.     He  may  still  be  attacked 


PIQUET.  165 

in  diamonds  or  in  clubs,  when  he  at  least  divides 
the  cards,  and  A  is  rubiconed. 

It  so  happens  that  A's  point  is  in  diamonds.  A 
reckons  five  for  point,  and  two  tierces  to  a  queen, 
in  all  eleven. 

B  reckons  three  kings. 

A  leads  diamonds.  B  wins  the  second  trick 
with  the  king,  and  leads  ace,  queen  of  spades. 
A  wins  the  queen,  and  leads  the  remaining  dia- 
monds, to  which  B  throws  a  diamond  and  two 
spades.  A,  supposing  B  to  hold  king  of  hearts 
guarded,  now  leads  queen  of  clubs,  and  B  divides 
the  cards.  If  B  had  called  his  six-card  point,  A 
would  have  led  ace  of  hearts,  instead  of  queen 
of  clubs,  and  would  have  won  the  cards. 

A  scores  98,  and  is  rubiconed. 

In  the  worst  possible  case  that  can  happen, 
i.e.,  if  A  leads  ace  of  hearts  instead  of  queen 
of  clubs,  notwithstanding  that  B  is  apparently 
guarded  in  hearts,  B,  as  already  pointed  out, 
still  wins  the  partie. 


-JS"^-- 


1 66  PIQUET. 


PLAYING  THE  CAEDS, 


COUNTING    THE    HAND. 

In  playing  the  cards,  you  must  be  guided  a 
good  deal  by  what  your  adversary  has  called, 
and  also,  to  some  extent,  by  what  he  has  not 
called  (but  see  Sinking,  pp.  156-165).  You  will 
generally  know  several  cards  in  the  adverse  hand, 
or  will  be  able  to  mark  some  that  have  been 
put  out ;  sometimes  you  will  know  all  the  cards, 
especially  after  some  of  the  tricks  have  been 
played.  For  instance  :  —  If  the  younger  hand 
fails  to  follow  suit  to  your  first  lead  of  a  suit 
of  which  you  could  only  have  five  cards,  it  is 
evident  he  has  put  out  three  of  that  suit.  You 
then  know  every  card  in  his  hand,  and  should 
regulate  your  play  accordingly. 

In  default  of  actual  knowledge  of  the  contents 
of  your  opponent's  hand,  you  should  count  his 
cards  so  far  as  he  has  called  them,  and  should 
consider  what  cards  he  is  least  likely  to  have 
discarded.  You  then  mentally  assign  to  him  the 
cards  he  has  most  probably  kept,  and  so  fill  up 
his  number  {see  Examples  I.  and  II.,  pp.  175-177). 


PIQUET.  167 

HABIT    OF    ADVERSARY. 

You  should  also  take  into  account  the  personal 
habit  of  your  adversary  in  discarding,  calling,  and 
playing. 

For  instance : — Some  players  habitually  make 
bold  discards,  and  throw  entire  suits.  These 
are  often  found  unguarded.  Others,  on  the  con- 
trary, are  timid  discarders.  These  are  generally 
guarded,  even  elder  hand.  The  timid  discarder 
is  apt  to  leave  a  card,  or  to  put  out  one  of  his 
point,  in  order  to  keep  himself  guarded.  In  the 
latter  case  he  may,  if  unguarded,  have  sunk  a 
card ;  but  timid  players  seldom  sink  anything, 
except  in  very  pronounced  cases. 

The  same  division  of  players  into  bold  and 
timid  applies  to  their  play  of  the  cards.  A  timid 
player,  for  example,  will  never  give  away  a  chance 
if  he  can  make  sure  of  dividing  the  cards.  Against 
such  an  adversary  it  would  be  useless  to  unguard 
a  king  in  play  (as  in  Examples  III.  and  IV., 
pp.  178-180),  because,  when  he  finds  himself  with 
five  tricks  and  an  ace  in  hand,  he  is  certain  to 
dash  out  the  ace. 

Some,  again,  always  throw  high  cards  when 
attacked  in  suits  in  which  they  are  guarded,  in 
order  to  induce  the  leader  to  continue  the  suit. 
Thus: — With  queen,  nine,  eight,  they  will  throw 
the  nine  to  the  ace.  If  a  player,  who  habitually 
does  this,  plays  the  eight  to  the  ace,  you  may 
conclude  he  has  not  got  the  nine,  and  that  he 
is  unguarded. 


l68  PIQUET. 

Your  safe  rule  as  to  playing  small  cards,  is 
not  to  have  any  rule,  and  to  play  them  some- 
times in  their  natural  order,  and  sometimes  not. 

PLAYING    TO    OBTAIN    INFORMATION. 

This  presents  itself  in  various  forms.  The  fol- 
lowing are  two  common  instances. 

You  have  ace,  queen,  nine,  eight,  seven  of 
hearts.  You  decide  to  lead  hearts,  notwithstand- 
ing that  your  adversary  has  called  kings,  and 
may  hold  king,  knave,  ten  of  hearts. 

You  lead  ace  of  hearts,  to  which  the  ten  falls. 

You  should  next  lead  a  small  heart,  not  the 
queen.  You  thus  discover  whether  the  knave  of 
hearts  is  out. 

If  your  adversary  has  not  called  kings,  and  it 
is  possible  that  he  has  discarded  a  king,  your 
second  lead  should  be  queen  of  hearts,  as  you 
may  find  the  knave  single  against  you. 

Again: — Several  tricks  have  been  played,  and 
you  are  in  doubt  what  to  lead.  You  have  a 
suit  headed  by  ace,  king.  You  would  generally 
be  right  to  lead  the  ace,  in  order  to  see  one 
more  card  before  determining  on  your  subsequent 
tactics.  This  point  of  play  is  of  more  importance 
than  at  first  sight  appears.  It  will  be  incidentally 
noticed  in  the  Examples. 

Conversely,  you  should  play  so  as  to  avoid 
giving  information.  Thus: — When  you  have  the 
choice  of  throwing  a  card  you  have  called,  or 
one  you  have  not,  you  should  prefer  the  former. 


PIQUET.  169 

You  have,  e.g.,  king,  queen,  and  a  small  one  of 
a  suit,  and  have  called  kings,  but  not  queens. 
Ace  is  led,  to  which  you  play  the  small  one. 
The  suit  is  continued;  you  should  next  play  the 
king. 

ESTABLISHING   A   SUIT. 

Failing  direct  indications  from  the  calling,  your 
first  lead  should  be  from  a  suit  you  are  likely 
to  establish,  such  as  king,  queen,  knave,  and  a 
small  card;  ace,  queen,  knave,  and  a  small  card, 
and  so  on.  It  is  obvious  that,  when  you  again 
have  the  lead,  you  should  generally  pursue  the 
suit  of  which  you  have  winning  cards  remaining. 

With  two  suits  of  equal  commanding  strength, 
you  should  generally  begin  by  leading  the  one 
of  which  you  hold  the  greater  number.  (For  an 
exception  to  this  rule,  see  p.  170.) 

PRESERVING  GUARDS  AND  TENACES. 

When  throwing  to  the  opponent's  lead,  you 
should,  of  course,  keep  guards  to  kings  and 
queens.  Exceptional  hands  occur  in  which  these 
should  be  unguarded,  owing  to  the  score,  or  to 
other  circumstances  {see  Examples  III.  and  IV., 
pp.  178-180). 

When  towards  the  close  of  a  hand  you  have 
a  tenace  in  one  suit,  and  winning  cards  with  a 
losing  card  in  others,  you  should  lead  the  winning 
cards  and  then  the  losing  card,  to  oblige  your 
adversary  to  lead  up  to  the  tenace.     Of  course, 


lyo  PIQUET. 

if  you  can  count  that  your  adversary  is  unguarded 
in  the  tenace  suit,  the  above  rule  does  not  apply. 

Also,  when  holding  a  tenace,  it  is  often  advis- 
able to  keep  a  losing  card  of  another  suit  of  which 
the  adversary  has  the  best,  in  order  to  give  him 
the  lead  at  a  time  when  he  must  lead  up  to  your 
tenace. 

When  you  hold  two  tenace  suits  of  equal  com- 
manding strength,  and  must  find  your  adversary 
unguarded  in  one  of  them  in  order  to  divide 
the  cards,  you  should  generally  first  lead  the  less 
numerous  suit;  and,  if  you  must  play  to  divide 
the  cards  (owing  to  the  score),  and  your  adversary 
is  equally  likely  to  be  unguarded  in  either  suit, 
you  should  always  attack  first  in  the  one  of  which 
you  hold  the  fewer  number. 

The  management  and  preservation  of  tenaces  is 
a  very  important,  and  often  a  difficult  point,  in 
the  play  of  the  cards.  {See  Examples  V.  to  X., 
pp.  181-1S9). 

PLAYING    TO    SAVE    A    CAPOT. 

When  you  are  put  to  a  card  {i.e.,  when  your 
adversary  has  won  eleven  tricks  and  you  remain 
with  two  cards,  and  are  in  doubt  which  of  them 
to  keep),  you  should  keep  the  card  of  the  suit 
of  which  the  greater  number  is  against  you. 

For  example: — You  remain  with  ace  of  spades 
and  ace  of  hearts,  and  have  to  play  one  of  them 
to  a  club  or  a  diamond  led.  By  counting  all  the 
cards  played,  and  your  discard,  you  find  that  there 


PIQUET.  171 

are  three  spades  wanting,  and  two  diamonds,  in 
respect  of  which  it  is  an  even  chance  that  any 
four  may  have  been  discarded.  In  that  case, 
you  should  keep  the  ace  of  spades. 

In  making  this  calculation,  you  should  include 
all  the  absent  cards  of  each  suit,  without  reference 
to  the  fact  that  one  of  them,  which  might  have 
been  reckoned  in  calling,  has  not  been  reckoned. 
For,  should  your  adversary  see  he  can  put  you 
to  a  card,  he  will  certainly  sink  the  combination 
which,  if  reckoned,  would  tell  you  what  his  twelfth 
card  is. 

An  exception  to  this  is  when  reckoning  the 
score,  previously  assumed  to  be  sunk,  would  give 
your  adversary  a  pique  or  a  repique.  Then  it 
would  not  be  worth  his  while  to  sink  a  card  on 
the  chance  of  a  capot. 

PLAYING    TO    THE    SCORE. 

If  you  have  five,  or  six,  tricks  and  a  winning 
card  and  the  lead,  play  the  winning  card,  unless 
certain  that  your  opponent  holds  that  suit,  either 
from  what  he  has  called,  or  from  the  cards  he  has 
already  played;  for,  by  playing  otherwise,  you  risk 
eleven  points  for  the  chance  of  gaining  one  for 
the  last  card. 

If,  however,  one  trick  does  not  make  the  dif- 
ference of  saving,  or  winning,  the  cards,  and  you 
remain,  at  the  end  of  a  hand,  with  a  winning  card 
and  a  losing  card,  you  should  generally  lead  the 
losing  card,  in  order  to  win  the  last  trick,  unless 


172  PIQUET. 

you  can  tell  that  the  adversary  has  none  of  the 
suit  to  which  your  winning  card  belongs.  For 
instance: — You  remain  with  ace,  queen  of  a  suit, 
and  the  lead ;  and  there  is  nothing  in  the  previous 
call  or  play  to  show  that  your  adversary  does  not 
hold  the  king  guarded.  The  presumption,  then, 
is  that  he  has  the  king  guarded,  and  you  should 
lead  the  queen,  in  hopes  of  making  the  last  trick. 

These  rules  are  liable  to  modification  in  conse- 
quence of  the  state  of  the  score.  For  example : — 
Although  the  rule  is  to  make  sure  of  the  cards, 
nevertheless,  when  one  point  saves  the  rubicon, 
or  wins  or  saves  the  partie,  you  should  risk  the 
cards  for  the  sake  of  the  last  trick.  Again  : — If 
you  are  elder  hand  and  have  the  best  of  the  partie, 
and  can  ensure  dividing  the  cards,  you  should 
never  risk  the  loss  of  them ;  but,  if  the  younger 
hand  has  the  best  of  the  partie,  it  is  often  to  your 
interest,  as  elder,  to  risk  the  loss  of  the  cards, 
if,  by  so  doing,  you  obtain  a  chance  of  winning 
them. 

For  an  instance  of  playing  to  divide  the  cards, 
see  Example  XL,  p.  189. 

It  often  happens  that  you  have  the  option,  when 
playing  the  cards,  of  making  a  certain  number  of 
tricks  off  the  reel,  and  of  letting  your  opponent 
score  the  remainder,  or  of  changing  the  lead  from 
your  hand  to  his,  and  vice  versa,  one  or  more 
times.  In  either  case,  you  win  the  same  number 
of  tricks;  but  every  time  you  part  with  the  lead 


PIQUET.  173 

and  regain  it,  each  player  scores  one  point  in  play 
more  than  if  the  cards  had  been  played  without 
changing  the  lead.  Whether  you  should  make 
tricks  straight  off,  or  should  play  in  and  out,  de- 
pends on  the  score. 

If  you  are  less  than  a  hundred,  and  are  not 
within  your  show  (see  p.  199),  you  should  play 
in  and  out.  If  you  are  within  your  show,  and 
your  adversary  is  not,  you  should  keep  him  back, 
by  refraining  from  playing  in  and  out. 

If  you  and  your  adversary  are  both  over  a 
hundred,  it  is  immaterial  whether  you  play  in 
and  out  or  not.  If  you  play  in  and  out,  for 
every  extra  point  you  score,  your  adversary  does 
the  same;  so  there  is  then  no  advantage  to  either 
side  (see  Examples  XII.  to  XVI.,  pp.  190-196). 

When  you  are  near  a  pique,  reckon  up  all 
the  winning  cards  you  have  in  hand,  to  ascertain 
whether  you  can  make  thirty  before  you  lose  the 
lead.  If  you  can  do  so,  lead  your  winning  cards 
one  after  the  other,  without  considering  how  many 
of  the  remaining  tricks  you  will  lose. 

There  is  one  exception  to  this  rule,  owing  to 
the  score.  Suppose,  in  the  sixth  deal,  the  score 
is  such  that,  if  the  younger  hand  wins  the  cards, 
he  saves  the  rubicon.  In  this  case,  if  the  elder 
hand  can  win  the  partie  without  the  pique,  and 
can  divide  or  win  the  cards  by  not  leading  his 
winning  cards  immediately,  but  would  lose  the 
cards   by  so   doing,   he  should    forego  the  pique 


174  PIQUET. 

in  order  to  win   a  rubicon   (^see  Example  XVII., 
p.  197). 

It  may  also  happen,  but  seldom,  that  similar 
tactics  should  be  resorted  to  in  the  fifth  hand, 
your  adversary  being  very  backward,  and  you 
very  forward,  in  the  score. 

In  the  last  deal  of  a  partie,  if  your  adversary 
has  scored  less  than  a  hundred,  your  object  should 
be  to  prevent  his  reaching  a  hundred,  and  at  the 
same  time  to  make  him  score  as  many  as  possible, 
provided  you  can  stop  him  short  of  a  hundred. 
You  should  endeavour  to  prevent  his  declaring 
equalities ;  and  if  you  cannot  win  the  cards  your- 
self, you  should  try  to  compel  him  to  win  them. 

If,  on  the  other  hand,  you  see  you  cannot  reach 
a  hundred,  your  object  should  be  to  score  as  little 
as  possible,  to  declare  equalities,  and  to  divide  the 
cards.  If  you  see  you  cannot  divide  the  cards,  let 
your  adversary  add  thirteen  (for  the  tricks),  and 
ten  (for  the  cards),  to  his  score.  You  thus  avoid 
scoring  by  in  and  out  play,  and  score  nothing, 
it  being  understood  that  you  are  not  piqued  or 
capoted  in  consequence  {see  p.  100  and  Ex- 
ample XIX.,  p.  201). 

EXAMPLES. 

In  the  following  Examples  both  hands  are 
shown,  for  the  sake  of  convenience.  But  only 
one  hand  is  known,  viz.,  the  one  of  which   the 


PIQUET. 


175 


discard  is  stated.  All  that  is  known  of  the  ad- 
verse hand  is  what  is  derived  from  calling,  or 
from  cards  already  played,  as  assumed,  for  in- 
stance, in  Examples  XII.,  XIII.,  and  XIV. 

The    score    is    assumed    to    be    love-all,  unless 
otherwise  stated. 

Example  I. 

Counting  the  haiid  from  the  call  of  point. 


A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (YouNGEK  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  seven  of  spades;  and  eight, 
seven  of  diamonds. 

A  calls  thirty-four  for  point,  not  good.  The 
only  four-card  point,  making  four,  that  A  can 
hold  is  in  clubs  {see  Table,  p.  155). 


176 


PIQUET. 


A  leads  the  diamonds,  to  which  B  follows  suit.  A 
then  leads  ace,  queen  of  spades ;  B  plays  ten,  king. 

B  should  now  lead  ace  and  another  heart,  when 
he  must  at  least  divide  the  cards. 

If  instead  of  leading  the  heart  he  leads  the  tierce 
major  in  clubs,  he  loses  the  cards. 

If  B  could  not  count  four  clubs  in  A's  hand,  he 
would  be  right  to  attack  in  the  tierce  major  suit 
For  this  reason,  and  also  because  if  B  has  a  four- 
card  point  it  will  most  probably  be  in  clubs,  A 
should  have  called  thirty-one  for  point.  In  actual 
practice,  however,  a  four-card  point  is  frequently 
called  under  similar  circumstances. 


Example  IL 

Counting  the  hand,  a  trio  not  having  been  called. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 


PIQUET.  177 

B  has  discarded  eight,  seven  of  spades;  and 
seven  of  hearts. 

A  calls  a  point  in  hearts,  a  quint  and  three 
knaves,  all  good.  He  leads  ace,  queen,  knave 
of  spades. 

A's  score,  in  hand  and  play,  is  now  twenty-six. 
He  did  not  call  three  queens;  and  as  these  would 
have  given  him  a  pique,  it  may  be  assumed  he  has 
not  got  them. 

To  the  spades,  led  by  A,  B  therefore  throws  ten 
of  spades  and  two  clubs. 

A  then  leads  a  heart.  B  wins  it,  and  attacks 
in  diamonds.  However  A  plays,  B  must  divide 
the  cards. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  A  had  called  three  queens, 
B  should  have  thrown  the  diamonds  to  the  spades, 
and  have  attacked  in  clubs.  He  assigns  the  ace 
of  diamonds  to  A  as  the  card  he  is  most  likely  to 
have  kept,  in  case  he  went  out  with,  say,  a  quart 
in  hearts  and  three  knaves.  Under  these  circum- 
stances it  is  more  than  probable  that  A  has  at  least 
one  club  out,  when  B,  by  attacking  in  clubs,  will  at 
least  divide  the  cards. 

Experienced  players  may  perhaps  think  that 
Examples  I.  and  H.  are  too  elementary  to  be 
of  much  use.  It  is,  however,  by  considerations 
similar  to  those  here  given,  that  even  the  best 
players  regulate  their  play  in  cases  of  greater 
difficulty.  Beginners  are  recommended  to  ob- 
serve carefully  the  importance  of  counting  the 
hands  [see  p.  166). 

N 


178 


PIQUET. 


Example  III. 

Unguarding  a  king  during  the  play,  in  hopes  of 
dividing  the  cards. 


A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (VouNGEK  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  knave  of  spades;  and  eight, 
seven  of  hearts. 

A  reckons  five  hearts  for  point,  and  a  quart 
major.  He  also  calls  three  queens,  which  are 
not  good. 

A  leads  the  hearts.  B  plays  ten  of  hearts,  nine, 
eight  of  spades  (unguarding  the  king),  and  knave, 
nine  of  clubs. 

If  A,  now  believing  B  to  hold  king,  knave  of 
spades,  leads  a  club  or  a  diamond,   and  retains 


PIQUET. 


179 


his  tenace  in  spades  to  be  led  to,  he  only  divides 
the  cards. 

For  remarks  on  unguarding,  see  p.  180. 


Example  IV. 
Unguarding  a  king. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

A  has  discarded  eight,  seven  of  spades;  ten, 
eight  of  hearts;  and  knave  of  diamonds. 

A  calls  four  cards,  making  forty-one,  B  re- 
plies, '*  Equal." 

B  reckons  a  quart  major  in  spades,  three  aces, 
and  three  knaves. 


l8o  PIQUET. 

A  leads  four  clubs,  to  which  B  plays  three 
clubs  and  a  small  heart. 

A  then  leads  king  of  hearts,  won  by  B  with 
the  ace. 

B  leads  four  spades.  A  plays  nine,  ten  of 
spades,  and,  without  hesitation,  eight,  nine  of 
diamonds,  unguarding  the  king. 

B  then  leads  a  heart.  A  makes  two  tricks  in 
hearts,  and  divides  the  cards. 

If  it  is  B's  habit  to  dash  out  an  ace  when  he 
has  five  tricks,  in  order  to  make  certain  of  dividing 
the  cards,  A's  play  is  difificult. 

A  has  probably  asked  whether  three  kings  are 
good;  and,  if  B  is  attentive,  he  will  most  likely 
count  queen  of  hearts,  and  king,  knave  of  dia- 
monds in  A"s  hand,  and  will  therefore  lead  a 
heart.  But  if  B  is  thoughtless,  and  does  not 
take  the  trouble  to  count  the  hands,  he  may 
lead  ace  of  diamonds  in  pursuance  of  his  usual 
tactics.  The  worse  player  B  is,  the  less  likely 
is  A's  coup  to  succeed,  and  A  must  regulate  his 
play  accordingly. 

Unguarding  a  king  (and  sometimes  even  a 
queen)  during  the  play,  if  done  without  hesi- 
tation, will  more  frequently  succeed  against  a 
high-class  player  than  against  an  indifferent  one. 
Of  course,  loss  of  the  cards  should  not  be  risked 
by  unguarding,  unless  the  score  renders  it  im- 
perative to  attempt  to  win  them.  Even  then, 
if  opposed  to  a  player  who  keeps  the  score  in 
view,  the  coup  will  hardly  ever  come  off. 


PIQUET. 


l8l 


Example  V. 

Lead  of  a  7tnnnt?ig  card^  to  preserve  the  tenace 
in  another  suit. 

A  {Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  ten,  eight  of  hearts ;  and  seven 
of  spades, 

A  declares  a  five-card  point  in  spades,  and  four 
queens. 

A  leads  king  of  spades ;  B  wins  the  trick. 

B  leads  ace,  king,  knave,  ten  of  clubs;  A  plays 
seven,  queen  of  clubs,  eight  of  diamonds,  and 
eight  of  spades. 

If  A  plays  queen  of  diamonds,  and  retains  eight 
of  spades,  he  is  immediately  attacked  in  diamonds, 
and  loses  the  cards. 

B  can  now  read  A's  hand.     It  consists  of  three 


I82 


PIQUET. 


spades,  queen  and  another  heart,  and  ace,  queen 
of  diamonds.  It  is  possible  that  A  has  put  out 
ace  of  diamonds  to  keep  his  four  queens,  and 
that  he  has  three  hearts.  B  need  not  consider 
this  point,  as  then  he  must  win  the  cards. 

B  now  leads  ace  of  hearts,  that  the  lead  may 
not  be  put  into  his  hand  again.  He  next  leads 
knave  of  spades,  when  he  must  make  a  trick  in 
diamonds,  and  win  the  cards. 

If  B  does  not  get  rid  of  the  ace  of  hearts,  A, 
after  leading  the  spades,  will  give  B  the  lead  with 
a  heart,  and  B  only  divides  the  cards. 


Example  VI. 

Leading  winning  cards,  to  preserve  the  tenace 

in  another  suit. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


m 

B  (Younger  Hand). 


PIQUET.  183 

B  has  discarded  nine,  seven  of  spades;  and 
nine  of  diamonds. 

A  calls  four  cards  for  point,  not  good;  a  quart 
major  and  a  tierce  to  a  knave,  good;  and  three 
kings,  not  good  . 

B  reckons  five  clubs  for  point;  three  aces,  and 
three  queens. 

A  leads  a  quart  major  in  spades;  B  plays  two 
spades  and  two  clubs. 

A  next  leads  knave  of  hearts.  B  wins  with 
queen,  and  leads  ace,  queen  of  clubs. 

A  wins  the  queen  of  clubs,  and  leads  ten  of 
hearts.  B  wins  the  heart,  and,  whatever  he  plays, 
must  lose  one  trick  in  diamonds.  Consequently, 
the  cards  are  divided. 

If  B  plays  properly,  he  wins  the  cards.  After 
winning  with  the  queen  of  hearts,  he  should  lead 
ace,  king  of  hearts.  Then,  after  leading  ace,  queen 
of  clubs,  he  must  be  led  up  to  in  diamonds. 

Of  course,  it  is  possible  that  A  may  hold  a  fourth 
heart,  or  a  double  guard  to  his  king  of  clubs.  In 
either  of  these  cases,  B  can  only  divide  the  cards, 
however  he  plays. 

The  beginner  at  Piquet  should  keep  these 
Examples  (V.  and  VI.)  well  before  him.  Getting 
rid  of  winning  cards  in  order  to  avoid  subse- 
quent leads  is  frequently  overlooked  by  those  not 
thoroughly  versed  in  the  game. 

There  is  also  the  complementary  case  of  re- 
serving a  losing  card  with  which  to  place  the 
lead,  illustrated  by  Examples  VII.  and  VIII. 


i84 


PIQUET. 


Example  VII. 

Keeping  a  losing  card  to  throw  the  lead,  in  order 
to  preserve  a  tenace. 


A  (Elder  Hand 


B  (Younger  Hand). 


A  has  discarded  nine,  eight  of  hearts;  and 
knave,  nine,  seven  of  diamonds. 

A  leads  king  of  spades. 

B  wins  it,   and  leads  the  diamonds. 

To  tliese,  A  should  throw  eight  of  diamonds, 
and  three  small  clubs.  He  should  on  no  account 
part  with  his  ten  of  hearts. 

B  now  leads  king  of  hearts.  A  wms  it,  leads 
the  spades,  and  then  the  ten  of  hearts,  to  get 
rid  of  the  lead,  when  he  divides  the  cards. 


PIQUET. 


1S5 


If  A  throws  ten  of  hearts  to  one  of  the  dia- 
monds, he  will  remain  with  three  clubs,  one  of 
which  he  must  lead.     He  will  then  lose  the  cards. 


Example  VIII. 

Keeping  a  small  card  to  throto  the  lead,  in  order 
io  preserve  a  tefiace. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

A  has  discarded  knave,  ten,  eight  of  spades ; 
and  eight,  seven  of  clubs. 
A  leads  king  of  hearts. 
B  wins  it,  and  leads  the  clubs. 
To  the  four  clubs  led  by  B,  A  should  play  two 


1 86 


PIQUET. 


clubs,  one  spade,  and  knave  of  diamonds,  keep- 
ing one  small  spade  with  which  to  get  rid  of  the 
lead. 

B  next  leads  king  of  spades.  A  wins  it,  and 
leads  the  hearts,  and  then  nine  of  spades.  B  must 
now  lead  a  diamond;  A  makes  ace,  queen  of  dia- 
monds, and  divides  the  cards. 

If  to  the  fourth  club,  A  had  thrown  nine  of 
spades,  he  would  have  been  obliged  to  continue 
with  a  diamond,  and  would  have  lost  the  cards. 


Example  IX. 
Leading  the  less  numerous  siiit. 


A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 


PIQUET.  187 

A  has  discarded  nine,  eight,  seven  of  spades; 
and  eight,  seven  of  hearts. 

B  has  called  three  queens. 

If  B  has  both  queen  of  hearts  and  queen 
of  clubs  guarded,  he  must  win  the  cards.  A 
should  therefore  play  to  find  in  which  suit 
B  is  unguarded.  If  he  begins  with  the 
club  suit,  of  which  he  has  five,  and  finds  the 
queen  guarded,  he  cannot  save  the  cards.  He 
should  therefore  attack  in  the  three-card  suit  of 
hearts. 

If  the  queen  falls  to  the  second  trick,  he  leads 
the  knave,  and  then  any  card  except  a  club,  and 
divides  the  cards.  If  the  queen  of  hearts  does 
not  fall  to  the  second  trick,  he  then  attacks  in 
clubs. 

Similarly,  A  declares  a  six-card  point,  viz.,  ace, 
queen,  and  four  small  cards.  B  is  guarded  in 
that  suit,  and  holds  ace,  queen,  ten,  and  two  small 
cards  of  a  second  suit,  and  ace,  queen,  ten  only 
of  a  third.  As  soon  as  B  obtains  the  lead,  he 
should  play  the  ace  of  the  suit  of  which  he  holds 
only  three.  If  the  adversary  is  guarded  in  that 
suit,  he  is  probably  unguarded  in  the  other.  If 
he  is  found  guarded,  B  then  attacks  in  the  other 
in  hopes  of  winning  the  cards.  Should  B  begin 
with  the  suit  of  which  he  holds  five  cards,  and 
find  the  adversary  guarded,  he  has  no  chance  of 
the  cards,  but  he  has  a  chance  by  playing  as 
directed.  If  A  is  guarded  in  both  suits  B  must 
lose  the  cards. 


PIQUE  r. 


Example  X. 

Leading  i/tc  less  numerous  suit.    Playing  to  the  score. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  seven  of  spades;  and  eight, 
seven  of  diamonds. 

A  calls  a  six-card  point  in  clubs,  a  tierce  major 
in  spades,  and  four  kings.  His  hand  is  known, 
therefore,  all  but  one  card,  and  either  the  king 
of  hearts  or  of  diamonds  must  be  unguarded. 

A  leads  tierce  major  in  spades.  B  plays  two 
spades  and  eight  of  hearts.  He  must  not  part 
with  his  nine  of  clubs. 

A  now  leads  king  of  clubs,  which  B  wins. 

B  should  lead  the  ace  of  diamonds,  because 
it  is  his  less  numerous  suit.  If  the  king  falls, 
he  continues  the  diamonds,  and  then  leads  nine 
of  clubs,  and  divides  the  cards. 


PIQUET. 


If  the  king  of  diamonds  does  not  fall  to  the 
ace,  B  next  leads  hearts,  and  divides  the  cards. 

If  B  leads  ace  of  hearts,  before  the  diamond, 
and  finds  the  king  guarded,  he  loses  the  cards; 
but  if  he  finds  the  king  of  hearts  unguarded,  he 
wins  the  cards.  B's  play  may  therefore  depend 
on  the  score.  If  winning  the  cards  wins  the 
partie,  or  saves  the  rubicon,  B  should  risk  the 
heart;  if  dividing  the  cards  wins  the  partie,  B 
should  lead  the  diamond.  Or,  if  B  is  consider- 
ably behind  in  the  score,  and  winning  the  cards 
brings  him  within  his  show,  he  should  generally 
lead  the  heart  {see  Example  XL). 


Example  XL 

Making  sure  of  dividing  the  cards. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 


1 90  PIQUET. 

B  has  discarded  knave,  ten  of  clubs ;  and  ten 
of  diamonds. 

A  declares  five  diamonds,  and  leads  the  king. 
B  wins  the  trick. 

The  probability  is  that  A  has  gone  for  diamonds 
and  queens.  It  is  not  at  all  unlikely  that  he  has 
queen  of  spades  or  queen  of  hearts  single. 

B  therefore  leads  ace  of  spades.  A  plays  the 
eight.  B  still  makes  an  effort  to  win  the  cards, 
and  leads  ace  of  hearts,  to  which  A  plays  the  seven. 

B  is  quite  in  the  dark  as  to  the  remaining 
spades  and  hearts  in  A's  hand.  As  it  happens, 
if  B  pursues  the  attack  in  hearts,  he  loses  the 
cards.  On  the  other  hand,  if  A  has  guards  in 
spades  instead  of  in  hearts,  and  B  continues  to 
attack  in  spades,  he  also  loses  the  cards. 

Under  these  circumstances,  B  can  make  certain 
of  dividing  the  cards  by  now  leading  king  of  clubs. 
If  the  score  is  such  that  he  must  play  to  win  the 
cards,  he  has  no  alternative  but  to  continue  his 
attack  at  random  in  one  or  other  of  his  ace,  king 
suits. 


Example  XII. 
In   and  out  play. 

The  last  three  cards  in  the  leader's  hand  are 
king,  queen,  ten  of  a  suit,  of  which  he  can  count 
the  adversary  with  ace,  knave,  and  a  small  one. 

The  leader  makes  certain  of  three  points  in  play 
by  leading  the  ten.     If  he  leads  king  or  queen, 


PIQUET.  191 

he  only  scores  two,  should  his  adversary  refuse 
to  win  the  card  first  led. 

In  one  case,  the  score  in  play  is  A,  two;  B,  three. 
In  the  other,  it  is  A,  three;  B,  four. 

A's  proper  lead  depends  on  the  score  {see 
pp.  172,  173). 

Again : — A  has  tierce  major,  and  two  small 
spades ;  and,  king,  queen  of  diamonds. 

B  has  called  four  knaves  and  three  aces. 

A  leads  four  of  his  spades.  If  knave  of  dia- 
monds remains  in  B's  hand,  A  makes  seven  in 
play  by  next  leading  a  diamond.  But,  if  A  leads 
the  fifth  spade,  and  knave  of  diamonds  is  thrown 
to  it,  he  only  scores  six  in  play. 


Example  XIII. 
In    and  out  play. 

A  has,  declared  in  his  hand,  ace,  queen,  knave 
of  spades;   and  king,  ten  of  hearts. 

B  holds,  ace,  queen,  knave  of  hearts;  and  king, 
ten  of  spades. 

It  is  the  last  hand  of  the  partie.  A,  who  is 
ninety-five,  leads  the  ace  of  spades,  which  makes 
his  total  score  ninety-six.  A  has  already  won  three 
tricks  (excluding  the  ace  of  spades),  and  B  four. 

If  B  throws  the  king  of  spades  to  the  ace,  A 
can  only  score  to  ninety-nine. 

If  B  throws  the  ten  to  the  ace,  each  player 
makes  one  more  point  in  play. 

The  card  for  B  to  play  to  the  ace  depends  on 
the  score      Thus: — If  B  requires  four  points  to 


192  PIQUET. 

save    the    rubicon,    he    should    play    the    ten    to 
the  ace. 


Example  XIV. 
Li    and  out  play. 

A  has,  declared  in  his  hand,  ace,  queen,  knave 
of  spades ;   ten  of  hearts  ;   ace,  nine  of  clubs. 

B  holds,  king,  ten  of  spades;  knave,  nine  of 
hearts;  king,  queen  of  clubs. 

A  can  count  B's  hand,  and  knows  him  to  be 
singly  guarded  in  both  spades  and  clubs. 

If  A  leads  ace,  queen  of  spades,  he  will  score 
five  in  play,  and  B  will  score  four. 

The  result  will  be  the  same  if  A  leads  ace,  nine 
of  clubs. 

If  A  leads  ten  of  hearts,  he  scores  six  in  play, 
and  B  five.  The  number  of  tricks  won  by  A 
will  be  the  same  in  either  case,  viz.,  three. 

After  what  has  already  been  said,  it  will  be 
clear  that  A's  lead  depends  on  the  score. 

Say  it  is  the  fifth  hand  of  the  partie,  and 
that  A  is  under  a  rubicon.  He  should  lead 
the  heart. 

Or,  to  take  an  extreme  case,  it  is  the  last  hand, 
and  A's  score  (including  what  he  has  already 
made  in  the  hand)  is  ninety-four.  If  he  does 
not  lead  the  heart,  he  is  rubiconed. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  A  is  well  ahead,  and 
his  game  is  to  keep  B  back,  he  should  not  lead 
the  heart. 


PIQUET. 


193 


Example  XV. 
In    and   out  play. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

B  has  discarded  eight  of  spades;  and  eight, 
seven  of  diamonds. 

A  scores  seventeen  in  hand  (point  in  spades, 
tierces  in  spades  and  hearts,  three  queens,  and 
three  tens). 

He  must  win  the  cards,  and  he  requires,  in 
addition,  ten  in  play  to  get  out  of  the  rubicon. 

All  the  cards  in  his  hand,  except  two,  are 
known  from  the  call.  It  is  highly  improbable 
that  he  has  put  out  both  ace  and  king  of  dia- 
monds, especially  as  he  does  not  reckon  the  ten 
of  clubs.  Therefore,  it  may  be  assumed  that  he 
o 


194 


PIQUET. 


has  at  most  two  clubs.  In  that  case,  he  cannot 
make  more  than  nine  in  play,  if  B  plays  properly. 

A  leads  the  spades.  To  these,  B  plays  two 
spades  and  three  diamonds.  A  then  leads  three 
diamonds,  and  any  other  card,  and  only  scores 
nine  in  play.     B  scores  five  in  play. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  B  requires  six  to  save 
his  rubicon,  he  should  keep  the  diamonds  guarded, 
and  should  throw  to  the  spades,  two  spades,  a 
heart,  and  two  clubs.  If  then  he  leads  a  diamond 
when  he  gets  in,  he  scores  one  more  in  play.  A 
scores  two  more  in  play;  but  B  has  succeeded  in 
saving  the  rubicon. 


Example  XVI. 

In    and  out  play. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Han-c). 


PIQUET.  195 

A  has  discarded  nine,  eight  of  spades  ;  nine, 
eight  of  clubs ;  and  ten  of  diamonds. 

It  is  the  sixth  hand  of  the  partie.  A  has  only 
four  aces  good,  which  bring  his  score  to  seventy- 
seven.  He  wins  the  cards,  and  has  to  reckon 
thirteen  in  play  to  save  the  rubicon. 

B's  point  is  in  hearts.  A  can  score  thirteen 
by  in  and  out  play,  unless  B  has  three  diamonds, 
and  attacks  in  that  suit.  Even  if  B  has  three 
diamonds,  it  is  unlikely  he  will  lead  them  until 
obliged,  as  he  may  find  A  with  ace,  queen,  ten 
of  the  suit. 

A  leads  seven  of  hearts ;  B  plays  the  nine. 
If,  instead  of  the  seven,  A  leads  ace,  king  of 
hearts,  as  he  probably  would  in  an  ordinary 
hand,   he  cannot  reckon  thirteen  in  play. 

B  leads  anything — say,  queen  of  hearts.  A 
wins  with  the  king,  and  leads  ace,  eight  of  hearts. 
It  is  compulsory  on  A  to  lead  eight  of  hearts 
after  the  ace. 

B  wins  the  eight  of  hearts,  and  next  leads  a 
club,  which  A  wins. 

A's  best  lead  is  now  seven  of  spades.  B  wins 
with  the  ten,  and  continues  the  club.  A  wins 
it,  and  must  return  the  seven  of  clubs. 

If  B  now  leads  a  spade,  A  wins  it,  returns  the 
spade,  and  then  leads  queen  of  diamonds.  Or, 
if,  instead  of  a  spade,  B  leads  a  diamond,  A  wins 
it,  and  leads  ace,  queen  of  spades,  and  makes  the 
last  trick  with  a  diamond. 

The  reason  A  leads  seven  of  spades,  at  the 
o  2 


196  PIQUET. 

sixth  trick,  instead  of  going  on  with  the  club 
suit,  is  now  apparent.  Suppose  all  the  hearts 
and  clubs  played,  and  that  A  remains  with  ace, 
queen,  seven  of  spades,  and  ace,  queen  of  dia- 
monds. B  has  king,  knave,  ten  of  spades,  and 
king,  knave  of  diamonds,  and  it  is  B's  lead.  B 
leads  a  diamond,  won  by  A.  A  leads  seven  of 
spades,  won  by  B,  who  again  leads  a  diamond, 
won  by  A. 

Now  A  remains  with  ace,  queen  of  spades,  and 
is  in  a  dilemma.  He  cannot  tell  whether  B  has 
two  spades  left,  or  a  spade  and  a  diamond.  If 
then  A  leads  ace  of  spades,  on  the  speculation 
that  B  has  one  spade  and  one  diamond  (the 
probable  case),  he  fails  to  score  thirteen  in  play. 
By  leading  the  seven  of  spades  at  an  earlier  period 
of  the  hand,  as  directed,  A  avoids  being  thus  put 
to  a  lead. 

At  some  scores,  A's  play  would  be  very  bad. 
As  played,  A  reckons  thirteen  and  B  ten.  By 
leading  three  aces  and  two  kings,  and  any  other 
card  (keeping  ace,  queen  of  diamonds),  A  makes 
the  same  number  of  tricks,  but  the  scores  in  play 
are,  A,  nine ;  B,  six ;  a  difference  of  four  to  each 
player.  Suppose  then  B  were  ninety-three  after 
counting  his  hand,  and  A  any  higher  score,  A 
should  not  play  in  and  out. 

Or,  suppose  it  is  the  fifth  hand  of  the  partie, 
and  that  A  can  reach  the  score  of  eighty-six, 
by  playing  in  and  out.  He  should  play  to  get 
within  his  show  {see  p.  173). 


PIQUET. 


197 


Example  XVII. 

Playing  to  the  score,  and  foregoing  a  pique. 

A  (Elder  Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

It  is  the  last  hand  of  the  partie.  A  has  dis- 
carded knave,  eight,  seven  of  clubs ;  and  ten, 
eight  of  diamonds. 

A's  score  is  seventy;  B's  score  is  eighty-two. 

A  has  a  pique,  good  against  the  cards,  if,  after 
reckoning  his  point,  quint,  and  three  aces,  he 
leads  his  aces  and  kings,  and  then  any  other 
card. 

If  A  plays  in  this  way,  he  scores  sixty,  and 
his  total  score  is  a  hundred  and  thirty.  B  scores 
eight  in  play,  and  ten  for  the  cards,  and  his  total 


198  PIQUET. 

score  is  a  hundred.  B  saves  the  rubicon,  and 
A  wins  a  partie  of  a  hundred  and  thirty. 

But,  if  A  foregoes  the  pique,  and  leads  ace 
and  another  heart,  he  must  divide  the  cards,  what- 
ever B  has  discarded.     A  then  wins  a  rubicon. 

Played  in  this  way,  with  the  hands  given  above, 
A  scores  twenty-four  in  hand,  two  in  play  (for  ace, 
queen  of  hearts),  and  six  for  the  last  five  tricks 
(in  all  thirty-two),  and  the  cards  are  divided. 

B  scores  seven  in  play  (this  he  must  reckon 
in  order  to  divide  the  cards). 

The  scores  will  then  be.  A,  a  hundred  and  two; 
B,  eighty-nine.  A  wins  a  rubicon  of  two  hundred 
and  ninety-one. 

By  foregoing  the  pique,  A  gains  a  hundred  and 
sixty-one  points. 

In  order  to  avoid  complicating  the  case  with 
other  considerations,  the  question  of  A's  best 
play  has  hitherto  been  neglected.  It  will  be 
seen  that  A  can  still  make  sure  of  dividing  the 
cards  if  he  leads  the  ace  of  spades  before  at- 
tacking in  hearts.  And,  he  may  find  B  un- 
guarded in  spades.  In  that  event,  he  wins  a 
pique  and  the  cards.  If  the  queen  of  spades 
does  not  fall  to  the  ace,  A  should  then  change 
to  the  heart  suit,  leading  ace  and  queen  as  above 
advised.  In  other  words,  A  should  not  thought- 
lessly throw  away  a  chance  of  a  pique,  because 
he  sees  he  can  certainly  win  a  rubicon  by  fore- 
going it. 


PIQUET. 


199 


Example  XVIII. 

Flaying  to  the  score,  afid  sinking  point  and  quatorze 
to  win  a  capot. 


A  (Elder  Hand 


B  (Younger  Hand). 


It  is  the  sixth  hand  of  the  partie.  The  scores 
are,  A,  forty-three ;  B,  ninety. 

A  has  discarded  eight,  seven  of  spades;  ten, 
seven  of  hearts ;  and  nine  of  diamonds. 

If  A's  point  of  thirty-nine  in  clubs  is  good,  B 
must  be  out  in  spades,  and  A  scores  a  repique. 

If  B  is  out  in  spades,  A  can  equally  win  a 
repique  by  calling  a  point  of  thirty-eight  in  dia- 
monds.    In  either  case  B  is  rubiconed. 


200  PIQUET. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  B  has  his  quart  in 
spades,  there  is  no  repique.  A's  resource,  then, 
is  a  capot,  and  this  he  can  win  if  B  is  unguarded 
in  clubs. 

But  A  may  possibly  capot  his  adversary,  even 
if  guarded  in  clubs,  by  inducing  him  to  believe 
that  clubs  are  out,  elder  hand.  If  A  calls  thirty- 
nine  for  point,  it  is  evident  that  the  point  is  in 
clubs,  and  B  will  keep  himself  guarded  in  that 
suit.  A's  object,  therefore,  should  be  to  conceal 
the  fact  that  he  holds  four  clubs,  and  A  should 
call  thirty-eight  in  diamonds.  It  has  already  been 
shown  that,  if  B  has  four  spades,  this  call  can  only 
injure  A  to  the  extent  of  four  points,  a  matter  not 
worth  considering  as  against  the  chance  of  a  capot 

B  replies,  "Not  good."  He  therefore  has  a 
quart  in  spades. 

A,  in  pursuance  of  his  tactics,  calls  four  kings 
and  three  aces  (not  reckoning  the  ace  of  clubs). 

A  leads  his  four  diamonds.  To  three  of  the 
diamonds  B  plays  nine  of  spades,  eight  of  hearts, 
and  seven  of  clubs.  B  has  now  to  play  one  other 
card.  If  he  believes  the  ace  of  clubs  to  be  out, 
he  will  naturally  throw  the  nine  of  clubs.  If  he 
does  so,  he  is  capoted. 

The  scores  will  then  be : — A,  seventeen  in  hand, 
thirteen  in  play,  and  forty  for  the  cards  and  capot; 
total,  seventy.  This,  added  to  his  former  score  of 
forty-three,  makes  him  a  hundred  and  thirteen. 
B  scores  eight,  making  him  ninety-eight.  A  wins 
a  rubicon  of  three  hundred  and  eleven. 


PIQUET. 


20I 


Example  XIX, 

Playing  to  score  as  little  as  possible,  and  to 
divide  the  cards. 


A    (Elder    Hand). 


B  (Younger  Hand). 

It  is  the  sixth  hand  of  the  partie.  A  has  dis- 
carded nine,  eight  of  hearts;  and  queen,  nine, 
eight  of  dubs. 

B's  score  is  fifty. 

A's  first  care  should  be  to  see  whether  B  can 
possibly  make  fifty,  which  saves  the  rubicon. 
Whatever  he  has  discarded,  he  cannot  score  more 
than  forty-seven. 

If  A  calls,  "  Forty-eight "  in  diamonds,  B  will 
reply,  "  Equal,"  and  will  declare  forty-eight  in 
hearts,  his  object  being  to  declare  equalities.     A 


202  PIQUET. 

should  call  twenty-nine  for  point,  which  compels 
a  score.     B  should  allow  this  to  be  good. 

A  should  then  call  a  quart  to  a  knave.  B 
should  say,  "  Not  good,"  as,  if  he  admits  it, 
A  also  reckons  a  tierce  in  diamonds. 

A  then  calls  three  tens,  which  B,  in  order  to 
conceal  his  hand,  allows  to  be  good. 

A  leads  ace  of  clubs,  that  he  may  not  risk 
being  put  to  a  card;  and,  as  he  cannot  win  the 
cards,  should  try  to  lose  them.  A  next  leads  king 
of  diamonds. 

It  is  now  B's  turn.  He  has  discarded  seven 
of  spades;  knave  of  clubs;  and  nine  of  diamonds. 
In  order  to  reckon  as  little  as  possible,  he  only 
calls  a  quart  in  hearts. 

B  wins  A's  diamond;  and,  if  he  plays  properly, 
can  divide  the  cards. 

B  leads  tierce  major  in  spades,  four  tricks;  ace, 
king  of  hearts,  six  tricks.  To  the  hearts  A  plays 
king  of  clubs  and  ten  of  diamonds,  endeavouring 
to  lose  the  cards  if  B  holds  knave  of  clubs  or  nine 
of  diamonds. 

B  now  leads  seven  of  diamonds.  A  wins  it 
with  the  knave;  and,  as  he  has  only  winning 
cards  in  his  hand,  the  cards  are  divided. 

If  A  had  continued  with  a  second  club  after 
the  ace,  B  should  have  thrown  the  ten  of  hearts, 
as  seven  of  hearts  and  seven  of  diamonds,  if  kept 
in  hand,  may  enable  B,  after  winning  six  tricks, 
to  get  rid  of  the  lead  when  A  remains  with  only 
winning  cards. 


PIQUET. 


203 


ODDS  AT  PIQUET. 


THE    SHOW. 

The  Shozv,  elder  hand  (when  small  cards  are 
counted  in  play),  is  twenty-eight ;  younger  hand  is 
fourteen.  That  is,  it  is  about  an  even  chance  the 
elder  hand  will  score  twenty-eight  or  more,  and 
that  the  younger  hand  will  score  fourteen  or  more. 

The  above  results  have  been  obtained  empiri- 
cally thus : — 

In   10,000  hands — 


The  Elder  Hand  scored 

28  or  more           27  or  less 

Times     

5129                       4S71 

It  is  therefore  slightly  in  favour  of  a  score  of  at 
least  twenty-eight,  elder  hand. 
In   10,000  hands — 


The  Younger  Hand  scored 

14  or  more 

13  or  less 

Times    

4997 

5003 

204 


PIQUET. 


This  gives  fourteen  as  the  show,  younger  hand. 

The  show,  when  small  cards  are  not  counted 
in  play  (as  was  formerly  the  case),  is  twenty-seven 
elder  hand  and  thirteen  younger  hand.  It  is  not 
known  how  this  result  was  arrived  at.  It  is  be- 
lieved that  it  can  only  be  obtained  by  the  laborious 
method  of  keeping  statistics  of  a  large  number  of 
hands,  as  has  now  been  done  for  the  rubicon 
game,  in  which  small  cards  are  counted  in  play. 

ODDS    AT   VARIOUS    SCORES. 

The  odds  at  various  scores  may  be  deduced 
approximately  from  the  following  tables : — 


In   10,000  Hands,  the  Elder  Hand  scored 


Under  10  

Between  10  and 
20 

30 
40 

50 

60 

70 

So 

90 
100 
110 
120 


40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

no 

120 

130 

140 

140  ,,  150 

150  or  more 


977  tir 

1743 

2S67 

2105 

902 

76 

166 

664 

106 

20 

88 

210 

40 


16 


PIQUET. 


205 


In   10,000  Hands,  the  Younger  Hand  scored 


Under 

10  .. 
n  10 

Betwee 

and 

20 

20 

30 

30 

40 

40 

50 

50 

60 

60 

70 

70 

80 

80 

90 

90 

100 

100 

no 

no 

120 

120 

130 

130 

140 

140 

150 

150 

or  more 

3556  times* 

2560 

2317 

944 

423 

35 

13 

21 

5 
28 

52 

38 

7 


To  Work  the  Tables. — Add  together  all  the 
hands  which  score  less  than  the  amount  required ; 
and  separately  add  together  all  the  hands  which 
score  the  number  required  or  more.  The  sum 
of  the  one,  as  against  that  of  the  other,  will  give 
the  required  odds  approximately. 

Examples. — -(i).  It  is  the  last  hand  of  a  partie. 
The  elder  hand  is  90.  Required  the  odds  in 
favour  of  his  saving  the  rubicon. 

The  odds  are  9023  to  977,  or  nearly  9^  to  i 
that  he  will  score  10  or  more. 


Of  these,  102  limes  he  scored  o. 


2o6  PIQUET. 

(2).  Required  the  odds  that  the  elder  hand  will 
score  at  least  20. 

The  odds  are  7280  to  2720,  or  about  8  to  3 
in  his  favour. 

(3).  It  is  known  to  be  an  even  chance  that  the 
elder  hand  will  score  28  or  more.  It  is  therefore 
slightly  against  his  scoring  at  least  30.  The  tables 
give  5587  to  4413,  or  about  5  to  4  against. 

(4).  The  odds  against  the  elder  hand  scoring 
40  or  more  are,  according  to  the  tables,  7692  to 
2308,  or  about  10  to  3. 

(5).  It  is  the  last  hand  of  the  partie.  The  elder 
hand  is  140  points  behind.  Required  the  odds 
against  the  elder  hand's  winning  the  partie. 

The  odds  given  by  the  table  are  9966  to  34, 
or  293  to  I.  The  elder  hand  must  get  a  repique 
and  capot  to  win.  In  a  few  cases,  the  younger 
hand  may  score  a  quatorze,  when  he  may  win,  not- 
withstanding the  elder  hand's  repique  and  capot. 
Making  a  full  allowance  for  this  contingency,  the 
odds  are  about  290  to   i. 

(6).  In  less  desperate  cases,  the  calculation  of 
the  odds  becomes  rather  more  complicated,  as  the 
consideration  of  the  score  made  by  the  younger 
hand  has  to  be  taken  into  account.  Thus  : — It 
is  required  to  find  the  odds  that  the  elder  hand 
will  score  90  more  than  the  younger. 

This  cannot  be  discovered  from  the  tables;  but 
it  may  be  approximated  to  as  follows  : — 

Including  the  cases  in  which  the  elder  scores 
between   90  and   100,  the  odds  against  him  are 


PIQUET.  207 

about  24^^  to  I.  Excluding  these  cases,  the  odds 
are  about  25  to  i.  It  may  be  concluded  that  the 
odds  against  the  elder  hand  are  nearer  to  25  to  i 
than  24  to  I. 

As  the  odds  against  a  repique  are  27^  to  i, 
and  as  an  elder  hand  repique  does  not  necessarily 
score  90  more  than  the  younger,  it  might  be  argued 
that  the  odds  should  be  more  than  25  to  i.  But 
more  than  90  may  be  scored  without  a  repique, 
as  by  pique  and  capot.  And,  on  looking  at  the 
table,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  elder  hand  scores 
over  100  more  than  eighteen  times  as  often  as  he 
scores  between  90  and  100.  Hence  it  would  seem 
that  the  odds  of  25  to  i  are  not  far  from  the  mark. 

(7).  Required  the  odds  that  the  younger  hand 
will  save  the  rubicon,  he  being  90,  last  hand  of 
a  partie. 

The  odds  are  6444  to  3556,  or  9  to  5  in  his  favour. 

(8).  The  younger  hand  wanting  20  to  save  the 
rubicon,  the  odds  against  him  are  61 16  to  3S84, 
or  about  13  to  8. 

NEGLECTED    VARIATIONS. 

The  tables  necessarily  neglect  variations  which 
may  arise  in  consequence  of  discarding  and  play- 
ing to  the  score,  the  great  majority  of  the  recorded 
hands  having  been  played  without  reference  to 
these  considerations,  and  all  hands  having  been 
omitted  in  which  a  player,  finding  his  game  hope- 
less, has  played  to  divide  the  cards,  or  to  score 
as  little  as  possible. 


2o8  PIQUET. 

The  odds  found  by  the  tables  can  only  be  re- 
garded as  approximate  odds,  and  as  less  than  the 
true  odds  against  a  player  who  has  to  gain  a  point 
for  which  he  especially  strives.  For  instance  : — ■ 
The  elder  hand  wanting  29  to  get  out,  and  seeing 
it  on  the  cards  to  make  that  number,  might  dis- 
card, or  play  the  cards,  accordingly.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  odds  may  be  more  than  the  true  odds 
against  a  player  who  has  the  partie  well  in  hand, 
and  who  is  only  scheming  to  keep  his  adversary 
back,  as,  e.g.^  when  the  elder  hand  sacrifices  a 
pique  in  order  to  win  or  to  divide  the  cards. 

ODDS    IRRESPECTIVE    OF    THE    TABLES. 

It  is  about  5  to  3  on  the  elder  hand  for  the 
cards ;  nearly  3  to  i  against  the  younger  hand's 
winning  the  cards ;  and  a  trifle  over  7  to  i  against 
the  cards  being  divided. 

The  odds  against  a  rubicon  are  about  7  to  2. 
The  odds  against  a  named  player  being  rubi- 
coned  are,  therefore,  8  to  i. 

A  partie  averages  two  hundred  points. 

The  odds  against  a  repique  elder  hand  are 
nearly  27^  to  i;  against  a  younger  hand  re- 
pique,  about  75  to   I. 

The  odds  against  a  pique  (which  of  course  in- 
cludes a  repique)  are  rather  more  than  7  to  i 
(about  36  to  5). 

The  odds  against  a  carte  blanche  in  a  named 
player's  hand  are  1791  to  i. 


THOS.  m  LA  EUE  &  GO'S  LIST. 


PUBUSHED  BY  THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.  LONDON, 

AND  SOLD  BY  ALL  BOOKSELLERS. 


WORKS  BY  "CAVENDISH." 

THE    STAKDAKD   WOKK    ON   PATIENCE. 
Demy  Oblong  4to.     Cloth,  Gilt.     Price  16s. 

PATIENCE      GAMES. 

WITH   EXAMPLES   PLAYED   THROUGH, 
lllufltratetl  with  numerous  Diagrams,  printed  iu  Colours. 

THE    STANDAHD    -WOEK    ON    WHIST. 

22nd  Edition  (SOth  Thousand).    8vo.     Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.    Price  Bs.   Greatly 

enlarged  and  revised  throughout.      Handsomely  printed  in  Bed  and  Black. 

THE  LAWS  &   PRINCIPLES  OF  WHIST. 


4th  Edition.     8vo.     Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.     Price  6s.     Handsomely  printed 
in  lied  and  Black. 

WHIST   DEVELOPMENTS: 
AMERICAN  LEADS  &  THE  UNBLOCKING  GAME. 

4th  Edition.     Svo.     Paper  Covers.     Price  6d. 

AMERICAN   LEADS  SIMPLIFIED. 

8bo.    Cloth,  Gill  Extra.    Price  It.  6d. 

WHIST    PERCEPTION. 

ILLUSTEATED     BY     END-HANDS      FUOM      ACTUAL     PLAY. 

By  "B.  W.  D."  and  "CAVENDISH." 


THE    STANDAKD    •WOKK    ON    PIQUET. 

9th  Edition.     8vo.      Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.     Price  5s.     Greatly  enlarged  and 

revised  throughout.     Handsomely  printed  in  Red  and  Black. 

THE  LAWS  OF  PIQUET, 

Adopted  by  the  Portland  and  Tirp  Clubs.     With  a  Teeatisk  on  tiik 
Gauk,  by  "Cavendish." 

4th  Edition.    8vo.    Cloth,  Gill  Extra.    Revised  throughout.    Price  8s.  6d. 

THE  LAWS  OF  ECARTE, 

Adopted  by  the  Turf  and  Portland  Clubs.     With  a  Treatise  on  the 
Game,  by  "Cavendish." 

and  Edition.    8vo.    Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.    Price  Is.  6d. 

ROUND    GAMES    AT    CARDS. 

By  "CAVENDISH" 


PUBLISHED  BY  THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.  LONDON, 

AND  SOLD  BY  ALL  BOOKSELLERS. 


3rd  Edition.     8to.     Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.     Price  Is.  6d. 

THE    LAWS   OF  RUBICON   BEZIQUE. 

Adopted  by  the  Portland  and  Turf  Clubs.    Edited  liy  "Cavkndish." 
With  a  Guide  to  the  Game,  bt  "Cavendish." 


9th  Edition.    8vo.     Cloth,  Gill  Extra.     Price  U.  6d.     Greatly  enlarged  and 

revised  throughout. 

THE   GAME    OF   LAWN-TENNIS 

(WITH    THE    AUTHORIZED     LAWS).       BY   "CAVENDISH." 


THE    POCKET    SERIES. 

By  "CAVENDISH."     Price  6<i.  each. 


WHIST  (5)— Guide;  Laws;  Leads;  Eules  for  Play  of  Second  Hand 

Rules  for  Play  of  Third  Hand. 
PIQUET.       BE'zIQUE  (with  New  Laws).      RUBICON  BEZIQUE. 
POLISH  BEZIQUE.  fiCARTE'.  CRIBBAGE.  EUCHRE.  IMPERIAL. 
SPOIL-FIVE.    CALABRASELLA.    DAAMA,  or  Turkish  Draughts. 
SIXTY-SIX.   DOMINOES.  CHESS.  DRAUGHTS.  BACKGAMMON. 

THE   STANDARD   WORK  ON   BILLIARDS. 
6th  Edition.     Carefully  revised.     Crown  8vo.     Cloth.     Price  10s.  6d. 

BILLIARDS. 

B?  J.  BENNETT,  Retired  Champion.     Edited  bt  "CAVENDISH." 
With  upwards  of  200  Illustrations. 


CLAY    ON    WHIST. 

Improted  Edition.     Cap.  8vo.     Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.     Price  Si.  fid. 

LAWS  OF  SHORT  WHIST, 

By  J.  L.  BALDWIN; 

AND   A   TREATISE   ON   THE   GAME, 

By  JAMES   CLAY. 


Sth  Edition.  Revised  and  Augmented.  Cap.8ro.  Cloth,  Gilt  Extra.  Price  3s. 6d. 

THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WHIST. 

By  Dr.  POLE,  F.R.S. 
All  Essay  on  the  Scientific  and  Intellectual  Aspects  of  the  Modern  Game. 

£y  the  same  Author.   Handsomely  printed  on  a  Card.   Price  3d. 

PHILOSOPHICAL   WHIST   RHYMES. 


May  be  had  of  all  Booksellers  and  Stationers. 


RUBICON  BEZIQUE 

(With    the    AUTHORIZED    LAWS)    as    played   at   the 
Portland  and  Ttjrf  Clubs, 

"WITH  A  GUIDE   TO    THE    GAME. 

By  "CAVENDISH." 

Four  Packs  of  Bezique  Playing  Cards  and  B^zique  Markers 

(with  Table  of  Scores),  etc.,  etc. 

In  a  great  variety  of  neat  and  ornamental  Caxe.i. 

Prices  from  5/-  to  60/- 


PIQUET. 

WITH  A   GUIDE   TO    THE    GAME. 

By  "CAVENDISH." 

Two  Packs  of  Playing  Cards  and  Two  Scoring  Blocks,  etc. 

In  a  variety  of  Lcatlier  Cases. 

Prices  from  8/-  to  25/- 


RUBICON  BEZIQUE  AND  PIQUET. 

In  handsome  Leatlier  Cases,  containing 
THE    TWO    GAMES    COMBINED. 

Prices  from  42/-  to  70/- 


Wholksale  oni.t  of 

THOS.    DE     LA     RUE     &     CO. 

BUNHILL    ROW,    LONDON. 


MANUFACTURED  BY  THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO. 

AND  SOLD  BY  ALL  BOOKSELLEKS  AND  STATIONERS. 


PATENT  "PNEUMATIC"  PLAYING  CARDS. 

EASY   SHUFFLING.        PERFECT   DEALING. 

The  Fronts  of  tlie"  Pneumatic  "Play  inp;  Cards  are  highly  finished,  whilst  the 
Backs  are  minutely  grooved  or  indenteuall  over  tlie  surface,  so  as  to  provide 
an  air-space  between  the  cards,  and  a  roughened  surface  wliich  acts  as  k 
resistance  for  the  Uiumb  in  dealing.  This  PREVENTS  MISDEALS,  as  the 
cards  sUde  off  one  by  one  and  can  be  dealt  with  the  greatest  ease  and  rapidity. 

PATENT  PLAYING  CARDS. 

MOGULS  (OE  Best  Quality),  HARRYS  (oh  Second  Quality),  and 
the   cheaper  kinds  of  HARRYS  and   HIGHLANDERS,  with  Round  or 

Square  Corners,  in  great  variety. 

The   rovnd-cornered   cards  are  ait  by  improved  machinery  to   an  absolute 

uniformity  in  size  and  shape. 

"DEXTER"  PLAYING  CARDS, 

Extra  Thin. 

WiTB  Patent  IHDSX-Pirs,  Rounded  CoRNsaa,  and  Enausmid  Faces. 

"PIGMY"  PLAYING  CARDS. 

Best  Quality.     Highly  Enamelled  Backs,  in  Assorted  Tints. 
Adapted  for  the  Game  of  "  Patienck."     Price  \s.  per  Box  of  Two  Packs. 

"PATIENCE"  PLAYING  CARDS. 

iNDBS-Firs,  Best  Quality,  Hishlt  Enamelled  Backs,  in  Assobted  Tints. 
In  a  variety  of  styles.     Prices  from  2j.  6</.  per  Box  of  Two  Packs. 

"MIDGET"  TOY  PLAYING  CARDS. 

Tinted  Backs,  Assorted.    In  neat  Tuck  Cases,  Prick  2<i.  per  Pack. 

BEZIQUE  PLAYING  CARDS, 

IN  BOXES,  FOR  TWO,  THREE,  OR  FOUR  PLAYERS. 

With  Markers,  and  "Guide"  by  "Cavendish." 

In  a  great  variety  of  styles.     Prices  from  2j.  M.  to  63*. 


In  neat  Cardboard  Case,  Price  6d.      In  handsome  Ltather  Cast,  Price  8s. 

"INDEX"  DOMINOES  (REGISTERED). 

handsomely  printed  in  black  and  gold. 
On  liighly-finished  Cardboard,  with  the  Indices  in  the  left-haud  comers. 

A  NEW  AND  AMUSING   DIVERSION  FOR  YOUNG  AND  OLD. 
Price  One  Shillinff.      Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall. 

WORD-MAKING  AND  WORD-TAKING. 

EACH  BOX  CONTAINS  OVER  300  LETTERS. 

Printed  on  highly-finished  Enamelled  Cardboard,  with  Rules  of  the  Game. 

A   CHEAPER  ISSUE,   PRICE   SIXPENCE, 

CONTAINING  HALF  THE  ABOVE  QUANTITY  OF  LETTERS. 


PUBLISHED  BY  THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.,  LONDON, 

AND  SOLD  BY  ALL  BOOKSELLERS  AND  STATIONERS. 


DE     LA    RUE'S 

INDELIBLE    DIARIES 

AND   RED-LETTER  CALENDARS. 


POCKET    DIARIES. 

Dk  La  Rue's  Imfkoved  Indki.ible   Diaries  A^D  Memobahduh   Books,  in  four 

sizes,  iu  a  ^reat  variety  of  biniiiD}i;s. 

A  size,  34  by  1}  in.      B  sue.  35  by  ii  in-      C  size.  -IJ  by  ii  in.     D  size,  53  by  3J  in. 

CONDENSED    DIARIES    AND    ENGAGEMENT    BOOKS, 

In  tbree  sizes  (A,  B,  &  C,  as  above),  in  a  sreat  variety  of  bindings. 

PORTABLE    DIARIES. 

B  size,  33  by  2J  in.      D  size,  53  by  3J  in. 
Thin,  light,  and  flexible,  in  a  variety  of  leather  cases.    Adapted  for  the  Pocket. 

HALF-CROWN    DIARY. 

De    La    Rue's    Improved    Diabt    amd    Memoramdum    Book;     for  Library    or 

Countins-house  use.     E  size,  71  by  43  inches. 

POCKET    CALENDARS. 

Uk  La    Rue's    Red-Letter    Calendars    ani>    .\lmakacs,  in  two  sizes  (A  Si  B. 

as  above),  suitable  for  the  Card  Case  or  Purse, 

"FINGER-SHAPED"    DIARIES. 
Id  elegant  sliding  cases,  extra  gilt.     Adapted  for  the  Pocket  or  Reticule. 

"THUMB-SHAPED"    DIARIES. 
In  elegant  sliding  cases,  extra  gilt. 

"PALM-SHAPED"    DIARIES. 
In  elegant  sliding  cases,  extra  gilt. 

WALL.    TABLET,    OR     EASEL    CALENDARS. 

The  "NOTA  BENE"  STYLOGRAPH 

(PATENTED) 

Is   ready   for   Instant   Use.    May   be 

carried  in  any  position  without 

fear  of  leakage.    Holds  a 

Large  Supply  of  Ink. 


In  Polished  Vulcanite, 

Handsomely    Enchased. 

With    Needle,    Spring,    and 

Nozzle,   made  of  the   Precious   Metals. 


MAY    BE    HAD    OF    ALL    STATIONERS. 


"PELICAN"  SELF-FEEDING  PEN 


10/6 


In  Polished  Vulcanite, 

Handsomely  Enchased. 
Fitted   with  a   Barrel    Pen   of 

Special  Construction, 
in   14-carat  Gold,   Iridium-Pointed 


(PATENTED) 

Writes   Instantly  and   Continuously. 
Has  Extra  Large  Reservoir  of  Ink. 
Secure  against  Leakage. 
Flow  of  Ink  to  the  Pen 
can  be  regulated  with 
the  greatest  nicety. 


10/6 


"SWIFT"  RESERVOIR  PENHOLDER 


3/6 


(PATENTED) 


S«0?^l^^i 


3/6 


Holds  a  large  supply  of  Ink;  ready  for  instant  use. 

The  construction  of  the  Holder  affords  absolute  security  against 
leakage,  and  preserves  the  Ink  for  any  length  of  time.  Cannot 
corrode  or  get  out  of  order,  heing  made  entirely  of  hard 
vulcanite. 

Fitted  vrith  Iridinm-Pointed  \on-Corrodible  Pen  . , . , 3s.  6d. 

n       Union  Gold  Fen,  Iridium-Pointed  ,....,,...,,,,, 58. 64 

It        Superior   n  n  , ,  lOs.  6d. 

«        U-Carat  »  .  and  Gilt  Mounts 128. 6d. 


Refills: — Iridinm-Point«d  Gold  Pens,  2s.  6d.  eath;  ditto.  Best  Quality,  58.  and  Ts.  6i 
"Swift"  Non-Corrodible  Iridium-Pointed  Pens,  6d.  tick 


Wholesale  only  of  the  Sole  Manufacturers, 

THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.,  BunliillEow,  LONDON,  E.G. 


THE  "ORB" 

GOLD-COIITED  ftClD-RESISTINE  PENS. 

FINE,  MEDIUM,  BROAD,  AND    EXTRA    BROAD. 


containing 
One  Dozen, 

1/- 


GOLD-COATED 
|g.U3m.!.M:4ca|  P  E  N  S 


Card  holding 

>^ -Dozen, 

Assort*.  Points 

6d. 


These  Pens  are  made  of  a  Non- Rusting  Alloy,  Plated  with  Real 
Gold,  and  possess  excellent  Writing  Qualities. 

THE  "ORB" 

CONSW  SERVICE  FOUmiN  PENHOLDER 

(PATENTED) 


n  IQ  IN    FINELY    POLISHED  rt  //> 

u/yj  HARD   VULCANITE.  u/U 

CARRYING  AN  ACID-RESISTING  NIB,  GOLD-COATED. 


SPECIAL     ADVANTAGES:— 
Carries  an  unusually  larg-e  quantity  of  Ink. 
Does  not  require  any  adjustment  before  use. 
Pen-nibs  of  an  inexpensive  character  may  be  used,  and 

can  be  easily  replaced. 
When  empty,  may  be  dipped  and  used  as  an  ordinary  Pen. 


MAY    BE    HAD    OF    ALL    STATIONERS. 

ir/iolesale  only  of  the  Sole  Manufacturers, 

THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.,  Bunhill  Row,  London,  E.G. 


MAY    BE    HAD    OP    ALL    STATIONERS. 


ISOBATH"  CONSTANT- LEIEL INCTND 

(PATENTED) 

AUTOMATIC   IN  ACTION. 
SECURING   UNEQUALLED  ADVANTAGES. 

Adapted  for 
all   Countries 

and 
all  Climates. 

Made  in 

a  variety  of 

useful  and 

ornamental 

SECTION,  SHOWING  CONSTRUCTION  forms. 

The  Float  is  so  weighted  and  poised  as  always  to  keep  the  Ink  on  the  same 
level,  whatever  quantity  may  be  contained  in  the  Keservoir.  The  Mechanism  cannot 
get  out  of  order,  as  all  the  materials  used  are  entirely  unaffected  by  Ink. 

Has  a  lar^e  Reservoir  of  Ink,  enclosed  from  dust  and  evaporation,  and  a  small 
Dinping-Well  in  which  the  Ink  is  always  maintained  at  the  same  level. 

The  Ike  is  .\lwav3  Ready;  Always  op  the  Right  DEriB  for  dipping; 
Always  Fbesh  and  Cleab  for  use. 

PRICES  from  2/6  to  45/- 


THE  PATENT 
CONSTANT-LEVEL 


"ISOBATH" 
MUCILAGE 


JAR. 


Fitted  with  Brush  and  Cap,  complete,  Price  6/- 


THE  PATENT  "ISOBATH" 
CONSTANT-LEVEL  STAMP  &  ENVELOPE  DAMPER. 


PRICE  10/6 


^2  ilocai  'gctUvs  patent. 
THE  *'CAVENDISH"   WHIST    MARKER. 
THE  "CAVENDISH"  PiaUET   MARKER. 
THE  "CAVENDISH"  BEZiaUE   MARKER. 


THE 


Price  One  Shilling  and  Sixpence. 

SIMPLEX"  POCKET  WHIST  CASE. 


This  Case  is  constracted  with  Markers  recessed  in  the  back,  and  contains  i 
Pacli  of  superior  Playing  Cards  and  a  Card  of  Whist  Rules. 


MAY    BE    HAD    OF    ALL    STATIONERS. 


PATENT  REVERSIBLE  PEN-CLEANER 

SOLE   LICENSEES:    THOS.   DE   LA   RUE   &  CO. 

Prices  from       s.ze,44x34inche..     Iif  Reversible  Pads 

1  /-  each.         ^^^^^.^Mk     2(1.  each. 


The  Pen,  when  not  in  use,  should  be  thrust  into  the  Fad  perpendicularly,  a* 
shown  in  the  cut.  The  Pad  may  be  reversed,  when  soiled  from  long  use,  by  pushing 
it  out  from  the  bottom.  When  the  base  is  screwed  to  a  desk,  for  Public  use,  the  Pad 
may  be  prized  out  readily  from  the  lop.    Can  also  be  used  as  a  Pin-cushioo. 


W/wiesale  only  of  the  Sole  Mami/acturers^ 

THOS.  DE  LA  RUE  &  CO.,   Bunhill  Row,  LONDON. 

RANSOME'S     PATENT 

POCKET  INKSTANDS. 

These  compact  and  convenient  Inkstands  are  sold  in  the  four  sizes  given 
below,  and  will  be  found  very  suitable  for  the  Pocket  or  Travelling  Bag. 
Their  constmction  secures  them  from  leakage 
and  from  the  liability  to  be  upset  wlien  in  use. 


^     OPEN 

^p 

SHUT 

Metal  Frame 

...     Size,  2i  X  14  in. 

.     6b. 

Od. 

Polished  Walnut  Frame     

,     2|  X  1|  , 

6s. 

Od. 

,                    ,               

...        ,     2J  X  2i   , 

7b. 

ed. 

.:::...:;;. 

,.     3|  X  2f  . 

10b. 

6d. 

Wholesale  only  of  the  Sole  Agents, 

THOS.    DE    LA   RUE    &    CO.,    LONDON. 


mvy.  Of  CALiF.  LiBRARY«  LOS  ANGEUi 


L  005  119  643  4